Epson T7000 User Manual

®
®
Epson SureColor  
T7000  
T5000  
T3000  
User’s Guide  
Co nte nts  
Cop yrig hts a nd Tra d e m a rks  
Cha p te r 1 Introd uc tion  
Important Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
When choosing a place for this product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
When setting up this product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
When using this product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
When handling the ink cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Warnings, Cautions, Important and Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Illustrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Printer Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Front section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Roll paper adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Screen View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
High Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
High Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Ease-of-Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Notes on Usage and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Installation space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Notes when using the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Notes when not using the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Notes on handling ink cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Notes on handling paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Using the Supplied Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Contents of the Software CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Summary of the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Cha p te r 2 Ba sic Op e ra tions  
Loading and Removing the Roll Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Loading Roll Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Cutting the roll paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Removing the roll paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Loading and Removing Cut Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Loading Cut Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Contents  
3
Removing Cut Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Loading and Removing Poster Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Loading Poster Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Removing Poster Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Viewing and Changing Media Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Checking Media Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Replacing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Using the Paper Basket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Using the Auto Take-up Reel Unit (SureColor T7000 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Using the Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Attaching the Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Removing Paper from the Auto Take-up Reel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Basic Printing Methods (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Printable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Roll Paper Printable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Cut Sheets Printable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Turning Off the Power Using Power Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Canceling from the computer (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Canceling from the computer (Mac OS X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Canceling on the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Cha p te r 3 Using the Op tiona l Ha rd Disk Unit  
The Purpose of the Hard Disk Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Saving Print Jobs to the Hard Disk Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Viewing and Printing Saved Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
Cha p te r 4 More Wa ys to Print  
Enlargements and Horizontal and Vertical Banners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
Fitting Documents to the Width of the Roll Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Choosing a Print Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Fitting Documents to the Output Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Printing at Non-Standard Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Printing CAD Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Borderless Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Types of Borderless Printing Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Supported Media Sizes for Borderless Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
About Roll Paper Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
Setting Procedures for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Contents  
4
Correct Color and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Mac OS X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
Multi-Page/Poster Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
Folded Double-Side (Windows only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120  
N-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
Poster (Windows only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
Printing Multiple Documents (the Layout Manager)  
(Windows Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131  
Setting Procedures for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Saving and Recalling Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Cha p te r 5 Color Ma na g e m e nt Printing  
About Color Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135  
Color Management Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
Setting color management with the applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
Setting color management with the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
Setting profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137  
Setting Color Management with the Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138  
Setting Color Management with the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140  
Color management printing by Host ICM (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140  
Color management printing by ColorSync (Mac OS X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142  
Color management printing by Driver ICM (Windows only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143  
Cha p te r 6 Tip s for Using the Printe r Drive r (Wind ows)  
Displaying the Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146  
From the Printer icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146  
Displaying Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Click the Help Button to Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Right-click on the item you want to check and display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149  
Customizing the Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
Saving various settings as your Select Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
Adding Media Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
Rearranging display items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153  
Overview of the Utility Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155  
Uninstalling the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158  
Contents  
5
Cha p te r 7 Tip s for Using the Printe r Drive r (Ma c OS X)  
Displaying the Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160  
Displaying Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160  
Using Epson Printer Utility 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
Starting Epson Printer Utility 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
Epson Printer Utility 4 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
Uninstalling the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163  
Removing EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163  
Cha p te r 8 Using the Control Pa ne l Me nu  
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
Menu Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170  
Print Queues menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170  
Paper menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171  
Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174  
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175  
Enlarged Copy menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183  
Cha p te r 9 Ma inte na nc e  
Adjusting the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184  
Checking for clogged nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184  
Cleaning the print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187  
Minimizing Print Misalignments (Head Alignment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189  
Replacing Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193  
Replacing Ink Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193  
Replacing Maintenance Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195  
Replacing the Cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
Cleaning the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Cleaning the outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Cleaning the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Cha p te r 10 Prob le m Solve r  
What to Do When a Message Is Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204  
When a Maintenance Call/Service Call Occurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
You cannot print (because the printer does not work) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
The printer sounds like it is printing, but nothing prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211  
Contents  
6
The prints are not what you expected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211  
Feeding or ejecting problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217  
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220  
Ap p e nd ix A Op tions a nd Inform a tion  
Options and Consumable Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222  
Supported Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
Epson Special Media Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224  
Usable Commercially Available Paper Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229  
Before printing on non-Epson media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230  
Notes When Moving or Transporting the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232  
Before Moving or Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232  
Notes on Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233  
After Moving or Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233  
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233  
Specifications Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235  
Standards and Approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238  
FCC Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238  
For United States Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238  
For Canadian Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239  
Ap p e nd ix B Whe re To Ge t He lp  
Contacting Epson Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240  
Ap p e nd ix C Softwa re Lic e nse Te rm s  
Open Source Software Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241  
Bonjour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243  
Other Software Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250  
Info-ZIP copyright and license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250  
Contents  
7
Cha p te r 1  
Introd uc tion  
Im p orta nt Sa fe ty Instruc tions  
Read all of these instructions before using the printer. Also be sure to follow all warnings  
and instructions marked on the printer.  
Whe n c hoosing a p la c e for this p rod uc t  
O Place this product on a flat, stable surface that is larger than this product. This product  
will not operate properly if it is tilted or at an angle.  
O Avoid places subject to rapid changes in temperature and humidity. Also keep it away  
from direct sunlight, strong light, or heat sources.  
O Avoid places subject to shocks and vibrations.  
O Keep this product away from dusty areas.  
O Place this product near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.  
Whe n se tting up this p rod uc t  
O Do not block or cover the openings in this product’s cabinet.  
O Do not insert objects through the slots. Take care not to spill liquid on this product.  
O This product’s power cord is for use with this product only. Use with other equipment  
may result in fire or electric shock.  
O Connect all equipment to properly grounded power outlets. Avoid using outlets on the  
same circuit as copiers or air control systems that regularly switch on and off.  
O Avoid electrical outlets controlled by wall switches or automatic timers.  
O Keep the entire computer system away from potential sources of electromagnetic  
interference, such as loudspeakers or the base units of cordless telephones.  
O Use only the type of power source indicated on the product’s label.  
Introduction  
8
O Use only the power cord that comes with this product. Use of another cord may result  
in fire or electric shock.  
O Do not use a damaged or frayed power cord.  
O If you use an extension cord with this product, make sure the total ampere rating of the  
devices plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the cord’s ampere rating.  
Also, make sure the total ampere rating of all devices plugged into the wall outlet does  
not exceed the wall outlet’s ampere rating.  
O Do not attempt to service this product yourself.  
O Unplug this product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the  
following conditions: The power cord or plug is damaged; liquid has entered the  
product; the product has been dropped or the cabinet damaged; the product does not  
operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in performance.  
O If damage occurs to the plug, replace the cord set or consult a qualified electrician. If  
there are fuses in the plug, make sure you replace them with fuses of the correct size  
and rating.  
Whe n using this p rod uc t  
O Do not put your hand inside this product or touch the ink cartridges while printing.  
O Do not move the print heads by hand; otherwise you may damage this product.  
O Always turn the product off using the Power button on the control panel. When this  
button is pressed, the Power light flashes briefly then goes off. Do not unplug the power  
cord or turn off the product until the Power light stops flashing.  
Whe n ha nd ling the ink c a rtrid g e s  
O Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.  
O If ink gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If it gets in your eyes, flush them  
immediately with water.  
O Before installing the new ink cartridge in the printer, shake it gently for about five  
seconds.  
O Use the ink cartridge before the date printed on its package.  
O Use up the ink cartridge within a year of installation for best results.  
Introduction  
9
O Do not dismantle the ink cartridges or try to refill them. This could damage the print  
head.  
O Do not touch the IC chip on the side of the cartridge. This may affect normal operation  
and printing.  
O The IC chip on this ink cartridge retains a variety of cartridge-related information, such  
as the ink cartridge status, so that the cartridge may be removed and reinserted freely.  
However, each time the cartridge is inserted, some ink is consumed because the printer  
automatically performs a reliability check.  
O If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and  
dust, and store it in the same environment as this product. Note that there is a valve in  
the ink supply port, making covers or plugs unnecessary, but care is needed to prevent  
the ink from staining items that the cartridge touches. Do not touch the ink supply port  
or surrounding area.  
Wa rning s, Ca utions, Im p orta nt a nd Note s  
Wa rning s m ust b e fo llo we d to a vo id se rio us b o d ily injury.  
Warning:  
Caution:  
w
c
Ca utio ns m ust b e fo llo we d to a vo id d a m a g e to this  
p ro d uc t o r b o d ily injury.  
Im p o rta nt m ust b e fo llo we d to a vo id d a m a g e to this  
p ro d uc t.  
Important:  
Note:  
No te s c o nta in use ful o r a d d itio na l info rm a tio n o n the  
o p e ra tio n o f this p ro d uc t.  
Illustra tions  
Unless otherwise noted, the illustrations in this documentation show the SureColor T7000.  
Introduction 10  
Printe r Pa rts  
Front se c tion  
1
2
Printe r c ove r  
O p e n this c o ve r whe n c le a ning the p rinte r o r c le a ring ja m s.  
Poste r b oa rd sup p ort  
Ra ise this sup p o rt so tha t yo u c a n p la c e the m e d ia o n it whe n p rinting o n p o ste r b o a rd . The  
sup p o rt e nsure s tha t p o ste r b o a rd fe e d s sm o o thly.  
Se e Lo a d ing a nd Re m o ving Po ste r Bo a rd ” o n p a g e 47.  
Introduction 11  
3
4
Ma inte na nc e b ox c ove rs  
Op e n the se c o ve rs whe n re p la c ing the Ma inte na nc e Bo x.  
So m e m o d e ls ha ve o nly the rig ht c o ve r.  
Se e Re p la c ing Ma inte na nc e Bo xe s” o n p a g e 195.  
Pa p e r b a ske t  
O utp ut fro m the p rinte r c o lle c ts in this b a ske t, ke e p ing the m e d ia c le a n a nd fre e o f c re a se s.  
It c a n ho ld up to 20 she e ts o f p la in p a p e r p rinte d in line d ra wing m o d e .  
The sta nd (24”) fo r the Sure Co lo r T3000 c o m e s with a p a p e r b a ske t.  
Se e Using the Pa p e r Ba ske t” o n p a g e 58.  
5
6
Ca ste rs  
The re a re two c a ste rs o n e a c h le g . The c a ste rs a re no rm a lly ke p t lo c ke d o nc e the p rinte r is  
in p la c e .  
Sta c k g uid e s  
Se le c t a g uid e a c c o rd ing to the size o f the m e d ia o utp ut to the p a p e r b a ske t.  
Se e Using the Pa p e r Ba ske t” o n p a g e 58.  
7
8
Sta c k g uid e switc h le ve r  
Use to c ho o se a sta c k g uid e .  
Ca rtrid g e c ove r  
Op e n whe n re p la c ing ink c a rtrid g e s.  
Se e Re p la c ing Ink C a rtrid g e s” o n p a g e 193.  
9
Ink c a rtrid g e s  
Insta ll a ll ink c a rtrid g e s into e a c h slo t.  
10  
11  
AC inle t  
Co nne c t the sup p lie d p o we r c a b le he re .  
Op tion p ort  
Use whe n c o nne c ting the o p tio na l a uto ta ke -up re e l unit.  
Se e Using the Auto Ta ke -up Re e l Unit (Sure Co lo r T7000 Only)” o n p a g e 61.  
12  
13  
LAN p ort  
Co nne c ts the LAN c a b le .  
Da ta lig ht  
The ne two rk c o nne c tio n sta tus a nd d a ta re c e p tio n a re ind ic a te d b y a lit o r fla shing lig ht.  
O n  
: Co nne c te d .  
Fla shing : Re c e iving d a ta .  
14  
Sta tus lig ht  
The c o lo r ind ic a te s the ne two rk tra nsm issio n sp e e d .  
Off  
: 10Ba se -T  
Introduction 12  
Re d  
: 100Ba se -T  
G re e n  
: 1000Ba se -T  
15  
16  
17  
USB p ort  
Co nne c t the USB c a b le he re .  
Control p a ne l  
Se e Using the Co ntro l Pa ne l” o n p a g e 62.  
Ale rt la m p  
This la m p lig hts o r fla she s whe n a n e rro r o c c urs.  
Lig hts o r : An e rro r ha s o c c urre d . Ho w the la m p lig hts o r fla she s va rie s with the typ e o f e rro r.  
fla she s  
The c o ntro l p a ne l d isp la ys a d e sc rip tio n o f the e rro r.  
Off  
: No e rro r.  
18  
19  
Roll re st  
Whe n lo a d ing ro ll p a p e r, p la c e it o n this re st a nd a tta c h the ro ll p a p e r a d a p te rs.  
Se e Lo a d ing Ro ll Pa p e r” o n p a g e 32.  
Ad a p te r g uid e s  
G uid e s fo r a tta c hing ro ll p a p e r. Mo ve the ro ll a lo ng the se g uid e s to a tta c h it to the a d a p te r  
ho ld e r.  
Se e Lo a d ing Ro ll Pa p e r” o n p a g e 32.  
20  
21  
22  
Roll loc k le ve r  
A le ve r tha t lo c ks ro ll p a p e r in p la c e a fte r the ro ll is a tta c he d to the a d a p te r ho ld e r.  
Ad a p te r hold e r  
The ro ll p a p e r a d a p te r is p la c e d in this ho ld e r a fte r the ro ll p a p e r is a tta c he d .  
Pa p e r slot  
The slo t thro ug h whic h ro ll p a p e r a nd sing le she e ts a re fe d d uring p rinting .  
Fe e d sing le she e ts o ne a t a tim e .  
23  
24  
Print he a d  
Fire s ink via hig h d e nsity no zzle s while m o ving le ft a nd rig ht to p rint.  
Roll p a p e r c ove r  
Co ve r to p ro te c t the ro ll p a p e r. Exc e p t whe n lo a d ing o r re m o ving ro ll p a p e r, it sho uld b e  
c lo se d whe n using the p rinte r.  
25  
Pa p e r e je c t g uid e  
G uid e s p a p e r o utp ut fro m the p rinte r sm o o thly into the p a p e r b a ske t.  
Roll p a p e r a d a p te r  
Use the supplied roll paper adapter when loading roll paper onto the printer.  
Introduction 13  
See “Loading Roll Paper” on page 32.  
1
2
Ad a p te r loc k le ve r  
Lift to unlo c k, lo we r to lo c k. Unlo c k whe n a tta c hing ro ll p a p e r to the a d a p te r, lo c k o nc e the  
ro ll is a tta c he d .  
Size le ve r  
Po sitio n a c c o rd ing to the size o f the ro ll c o re .  
Introduction 14  
Control p a ne l  
1
2
P b utton (Powe r b utton)  
Turns the p o we r o n a nd o ff.  
P lig ht (Powe r lig ht)  
The p rinte r’s o p e ra tio na l sta tus is ind ic a te d b y a lit o r fla shing lig ht.  
O n  
: The p o we r is o n.  
Fla shing : The p rinte r is re c e iving d a ta o r c le a ning the p rint he a d o r p e rfo rm ing o the r  
o p e ra tio ns in the c o urse o f b e ing shut d o wn.  
O ff  
: The p o we r is o ff.  
3
4
( b utton (Loa d / Re m ove Pa p e r b utton)  
Pre ssing this b utto n d isp la ys the Lo a d / Re m o ve Pa p e r m e nu. Instruc tio ns fo r lo a d ing o r  
re m o ving the p a p e r c a n b e d isp la ye d b y hig hlig hting e ithe r Re m ove Pa p e r o r the typ e o f  
p a p e r c urre ntly lo a d e d a nd the n p re ssing the OK b utto n. Fo llo w the o n-sc re e n instruc tio ns  
to lo a d o r re m o ve the p a p e r.  
Sc re e n  
Disp la ys the p rinte r’s sta tus, m e nus, e rro r m e ssa g e s, a nd so o n.  
Se e Sc re e n Vie w” o n p a g e 17.  
Introduction 15  
5
6
7
Me nu b utton  
Disp la ys the m e nu fo r the ta b c urre ntly se le c te d in the d isp la y.  
Se e Using the Co ntro l Pa ne l Me nu” o n p a g e 164.  
y b utton (Ba c k b utton)  
If m e nus a re d isp la ye d , p re ssing this b utto n ta ke s yo u up o ne le ve l in the m e nu hie ra rc hy.  
Se e Me nu Op e ra tio ns” o n p a g e 164.  
l/ r b uttons (Le ft/ Rig ht b uttons)  
O
Use the se b utto ns to se le c t ta b s. The se le c te d ta b is hig hlig hte d a nd the c o nte nt o f the  
info d isp la y a re a up d a te d fo r the se le c te d ta b .  
Se e Sc re e n Vie w” o n p a g e 17.  
O
If m e nus a re d isp la ye d , the se b utto ns c a n b e use d to p o sitio n the c urso r o r to d e le te  
c ha ra c te rs whe n e nte ring te xt fo r ite m s suc h a s Se tting Na m e o r IP Ad d re ss.  
8
9
u/ d b uttons (Up / Down b uttons)  
Whe n m e nus a re d isp la ye d , the se b utto ns c a n b e use d to hig hlig ht ite m s o r o p tio ns.  
Se e Me nu Op e ra tio ns” o n p a g e 164.  
Z b utton  
O
Disp la ys the m e nu fo r the ta b c urre ntly se le c te d in the d isp la y. (This b utto n c a nno t b e  
use d to d isp la y m e nus whe n the + is se le c te d .)  
Se e Using the Co ntro l Pa ne l Me nu” o n p a g e 164.  
O
O
Whe n m e nus a re d isp la ye d a nd a n ite m is hig hlig hte d , p re ssing this b utto n d isp la ys the  
sub -m e nu fo r the hig hlig hte d ite m .  
If p re sse d while a p a ra m e te r is se le c te d fro m the Me nu, the p a ra m e te r is se t o r  
e xe c ute d .  
10  
11  
b utton (He lp b utton)  
Exc e p t whe n p rinting is in p ro g re ss, p re ssing this b utto n d isp la ys the He lp m e nu. Hig hlig ht a n  
ite m a nd p re ss the OK b utto n to vie w he lp fo r the hig hlig hte d ite m .  
" b utton (Ma inte na nc e b utton)  
Disp la ys the Ma inte na nc e m e nu, whic h is use d fo r no zzle c he c ks a nd he a d c le a ning .  
Se e Ad justing the Print He a d ” o n p a g e 184.  
12  
W b utton (Pa use / Ca nc e l b utton)  
O
The p rinte r e nte rs p a use sta tus if this is p re sse d while p rinting . To re le a se the p a use sta tus,  
p re ss the W b utto n a g a in, o r se le c t Pa use Ca nc e l o n the sc re e n a nd the n p re ss the OK  
b utto n. To c a nc e l p rint jo b s b e ing p ro c e sse d , se le c t Job Ca nc e l o n the sc re e n a nd the n  
p re ss the OK b utto n.  
O
Pre ssing this b utto n while a m e nu o r he lp is d isp la ye d c lo se s the m e nu o r he lp a nd re turns  
the p rinte r to re a d y sta tus.  
Introduction 16  
13  
) b utton (Fe e d / Cut Me d ia b utton)  
O
This b utto n is use d with ro ll p a p e r o nly. If the p rinte r is lo a d e d with c ut she e ts o r p o ste r  
b o a rd , p re ssing this b utto n will ha ve no e ffe c t.  
O
It is use d to m a nua lly c ut ro ll p a p e r using the b uilt-in c utte r.  
Se e Ma nua l c ut m e tho d ” o n p a g e 39.  
O
If p rinting is no t c urre ntly in p ro g re ss a nd the p rinte r is lo a d e d with ro ll p a p e r, yo u c a n  
fe e d p a p e r a he a d b y p re ssing first this b utto n a nd the n the d b utto n. Pre ss the u b utto n  
to re wind . Ke e p the d b utto n p re sse d to fe e d the p a p e r up to 9.8 fe e t (3 m ). Ke e p the  
u b utto n p re sse d to re wind the p a p e r up to 7.9 inc he s (20 c m ).  
Whe n the u b utto n is use d to re wind ro ll p a p e r, the p a p e r will p a use whe n the e nd o f  
the ro ll re a c he s the sta rting p rint p o sitio n. Re le a se the b utto n a nd the n p re ss it a g a in to  
re sum e .  
Sc re e n Vie w  
1
Me ssa g e  
Disp la ys the p rinte r’s sta tus, o p e ra tio n, a nd e rro r m e ssa g e s.  
Se e Wha t to Do Whe n a Me ssa g e Is Disp la ye d ” o n p a g e 204.  
Introduction 17  
2
Ta b s/ Info Disp la y Are a  
The ta b / info d isp la y a re a c o nta ins the six ta b s liste d b e lo w.  
Use the l r b utto ns to se le c t a ta b .  
Info rm a tio n o n the se le c te d ta b a p p e a rs in the info d isp la y a re a .  
,
The Print Que ue s Ta b  
This ta b d isp la ys p rint jo b sta tus a nd c a n b e use d to a c c e ss the Print Que ue s m e nu.  
The Info Disp la y Are a  
The p rint q ue ue s ta b info d isp la y a re a sho ws the na m e o f the c urre nt p rint jo b .  
If a n o p tio na l ha rd d isk unit is insta lle d , it a lso sho ws the num b e r o f he ld jo b s, if a ny.  
Pre ssing the OK o r Me nu b utto n whe n this ta b is se le c te d d isp la ys the Print Q ue ue s  
m e nu.  
Important:  
A flashing , icon indicates that the optional hard disk unit is exchanging data with another  
device. Do not disconnect the power cord or turn the printer off while the icon is flashing. Failure  
to observe this precaution could corrupt the data on the hard disk.  
.
The Pa p e r Ta b  
This ta b sho ws the typ e o f p a p e r in the p rinte r a nd c a n b e use d to a c c e ss the Pa p e r  
m e nu.  
The Info Disp la y Are a  
The p a p e r ta b info d isp la y a re a sho ws the So urc e a nd Me d ia Typ e . Whe n ro ll p a p e r is  
use d , it a lso sho ws the ro ll wid th. In a d d itio n, whe n On is se le c te d fo r Roll Pa p e r  
Re m a ining , it sho ws the a m o unt o f ro ll p a p e r re m a ining . Whe n the le ng th re m a ining  
d ro p s b e lo w the va lue se le c te d fo r Re m a ining Ale rt, a  
ic o n a p p e a rs a b o ve the ta b  
ic o n a nd a n a le rt like tha t sho wn b e lo w is d isp la ye d to wa rn tha t the p rinte r is ne a ring  
the e nd o f the ro ll.  
Pre ssing the OK o r Me nu b utto n whe n this ta b is se le c te d d isp la ys the Pa p e r m e nu.  
Se e Pa p e r m e nu” o n p a g e 171.  
The Ink Ta b  
The ink ta b d isp la ys ink sta tus.  
The Info Disp la y Are a  
The ink ta b info d isp la y a re a c o nta ins ic o ns sho wing ink sta tus a nd the a p p ro xim a te  
le ve l o f ink re m a ining . The ic o ns c ha ng e a s fo llo ws whe n the ink is lo w o r a n e rro r o c c urs.  
No rm a l  
Wa rning o r Erro r  
1
2
1
Sta tus ind ic a tors  
The ink c a rtrid g e sta tus is ind ic a te d a s fo llo ws.  
No e rro r. The he ig ht o f the ind ic a to r va rie s with the a m o unt o f ink  
re m a ining in the c a rtrid g e .  
Introduction 18  
Ink is lo w. Yo u ne e d to p re p a re a ne w ink c a rtrid g e .  
Ink c a rtrid g e is e xp e nd e d ; re p la c e with a ne w ink c a rtrid g e .  
An e rro r o c c urre d . Che c k the m e ssa g e o n the sc re e n, a nd c le a r the e rro r.  
No n-g e nuine c a rtrid g e .  
Ep so n re c o m m e nd s the use o f g e nuine Ep so n ink c a rtrid g e s. Ep so n  
c a nno t g ua ra nte e the q ua lity o r re lia b ility o f no n-g e nuine ink.  
2
Ink c olor c od e s  
C
C ya n  
Y
Ye llo w  
M
Ma g e nta  
Ma tte Bla c k  
Pho to Bla c k  
MK  
PK  
The Ma inte na nc e Ta b  
-
The m a inte na nc e ta b sho ws the sta tus o f the Ma inte na nc e Bo x a nd is use d to d isp la y  
the Ma inte na nc e m e nu.  
The Info Disp la y Are a  
The m a inte na nc e ta b info d isp la y a re a sho ws Ma inte na nc e Bo x sta tus a nd the  
a p p ro xim a te a m o unt o f sp a c e re m a ining in the Ma inte na nc e Bo x. The ic o ns c ha ng e  
a s fo llo ws to sho w e rro rs o r to wa rn whe n the Ma inte na nc e Bo x is ne a ring the e nd o f its  
se rvic e life .  
No rm a l  
Wa rning o r Erro r  
1
1
Sta tus ind ic a tors  
Ma inte na nc e Bo x sta tus is ind ic a te d a s fo llo ws.  
No e rro r. The he ig ht o f the ind ic a to r c o rre sp o nd s to the a m o unt o f sp a c e  
re m a ining .  
The Ma inte na nc e Bo x is ne a ring the e nd o f its se rvic e life . Yo u ne e d to  
p re p a re a ne w Ma inte na nc e Bo x.  
Ma inte na nc e Bo x is a t the e nd o f its se rvic e life . Re p la c e the  
Ma inte na nc e Bo x with a ne w o ne .  
Pre ssing the OK o r Me nu b utto n whe n this ta b is se le c te d d isp la ys the Ma inte na nc e  
m e nu.  
Se e Ma inte na nc e m e nu” o n p a g e 174.  
Introduction 19  
The Se tup Ta b  
/
The se tup ta b d isp la ys the IP a d d re ss a nd m e nus fo r va rio us se tting s.  
The Info Disp la y Are a  
The se tup ta b info d isp la y a re a sho ws the IP a d d re ss c urre ntly a ssig ne d , if a ny.  
Pre ssing the OK o r Me nu b utto n whe n this ta b is se le c te d d isp la ys the Se tup m e nu.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
The Enla rg e d Cop y Ta b  
+
The e nla rg e d c o p y ta b is d isp la ye d o nly whe n a sc a nne r is c o nne c te d .  
Pre ssing the OK b utto n whe n this ta b is se le c te d d isp la ys the Enla rg e d C o p y sc re e n.  
Se e Enla rg e d Co p y m e nu” o n p a g e 183.  
Fe a ture s  
The main features of this printer are described below.  
Hig h Prod uc tivity  
High-speed printing  
The speed of the print head and paper feed have been increased for faster printing.  
The printer is equipped with a high-speed rotary cutter for quick cutting, significantly  
increasing productivity.  
Paper basket holds consecutive sheets  
The paper basket accommodates up to 20 sheets of A1/D- or A0/E-size plain paper,  
promoting automation for improved productivity.  
The stand (24”) for the SureColor T3000 comes with a paper basket.  
See “Using the Paper Basket” on page 58.  
Improved operability with an easy to see and use color screen  
Designed for intuitive operation, the large, brightly-lit, color LCD display is easy to  
understand and easy to use.  
The large display offers detailed, easy-to-understand error messages and illustrated  
guides to loading paper.  
See “Screen View” on page 17.  
Introduction 20  
Checking current operating status even from afar thanks to an alert lamp  
Errors are immediately obvious even at a distance, thanks to the large, highly visible alert  
lamp. This helps prevent any wasted time when printing has stopped due to running out of  
ink or paper.  
Hig h Re solution  
®
Thanks to newly developed Epson UltraChrome XD Ink technology, the printer can be  
used for high-quality posters and CAD drawings.  
CAD drawings: clear, legible, and with unsurpassed water resistance  
Newly-developed, high-density Matte Black ink enables the printer to produce extremely  
detailed drawings.  
Pigmented inks are used for all colors for unsurpassed water resistance, allowing print  
results to be safely carried out-of-doors.  
The printer driver offers a line drawing mode, making it easier to optimize printing for line  
drawing and, through unsurpassed reproduction of line drawing and fine lines in the form  
of connected lines, diagonals, and curves, ensuring the best possible results when the  
printer is used for drawings.  
Vivid, highly lightfast posters and displays  
Our new magenta ink makes red colors more vibrant and even more noticeable on posters.  
The printer driver offers a poster mode that simplifies the printing of vivid posters. Posters  
with vivid hues can be printed simply by selecting poster mode.  
Thanks to the pigmented inks used for all colors, the results are highly water-resistant and  
can be used for short-term outdoor display. They are also extremely lightfast and  
fade-resistant and can be safely displayed in direct sunlight.  
Ea se -of-Use  
Spindle-free roll paper adapter makes loading roll paper a snap  
The lack of a spindle makes it possible to load and remove roll paper even in environments  
where space is at a premium.  
To load roll paper, simply place it on the roll rest and attach roll paper adapters to both  
ends. The roll rest is low, making it easy to load paper.  
See “Loading Roll Paper” on page 32.  
Introduction 21  
Easy maintenance  
Roll paper and all replacements, including ink cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and cutters,  
are installed from the front, allowing the printer to be placed against a wall. The printer does  
not have to be moved to allow rear access.  
Choose from three sizes of cartridge according to the task  
Choose from 110, 350, and 700 ml cartridges according to the frequency with which the  
printer is used. Use cost-effective 700 ml cartridges for high-volume poster printing or mix  
different size cartridges to best fit your printing needs.  
New printer driver offers improved ease-of-use  
Print settings can be optimized simply by choosing the desired use or target. This spares  
you the trouble of adjusting print settings individually.  
On startup, the printer driver automatically checks the status of the paper loaded in the  
printer and displays it in the Media Settings dialog, preventing errors caused by failure to  
check paper status before printing.  
The printer driver displays printer settings graphically, reducing errors caused by  
inappropriate choices of settings.  
Introduction 22  
Note s on Usa g e a nd Stora g e  
Insta lla tion sp a c e  
Make sure that you secure the following space, clear of any other objects, so that paper  
ejection and consumable replacement are not obstructed.  
See “Specifications Table” on page 235 for the external dimensions of the printer.  
SureColor T7000/T5000  
5.9 inches (150 mm)  
0.4 inches (10 mm)  
5.9 inches (150 mm)  
23.6 inches (600 mm)  
SureColor T3000  
5.9 inches (150 mm)  
0.4 inches (10 mm)  
1.6 inches (40 mm)  
5.9 inches (150 mm)  
11.8 inches (300 mm)  
*
Whe n p rinting o n p o ste r b o a rd , m a ke sure tha t the re is suffic ie nt sp a c e b o th in fro nt  
o f a nd b e hind the p rinte r.  
Se e Lo a d ing a nd Re m o ving Po ste r Bo a rd ” o n p a g e 47.  
Introduction 23  
Note s whe n using the p rinte r  
Note the following points when using this printer to avoid breakdowns, malfunctions, and  
print quality decline.  
O When using the printer, observe the operating temperature and humidity range  
described in the "Specifications Table". See “Specifications Table” on page 235.  
Even when the conditions above are met, you may not be able to print properly if the  
environmental conditions are not suitable for the paper. Be sure to use the printer in an  
environment where the paper’s requirements are met. For more details, see the  
documentation supplied with the paper.  
Also, when operating in dry areas, air conditioned environment, or under direct sunlight,  
maintain the appropriate humidity.  
O Do not install the printer next to heat sources or directly in the path of air from a  
ventilator or air conditioner. Failure to observe this precaution could result in the print  
head nozzles drying and clogging.  
O The print head may not be capped (i.e., may not move to the right side) if an error  
occurs and the printer is turned off without first resolving the error. Capping is a function  
for automatically covering the print head with a cap (lid) to prevent the print head from  
drying out. In this case, turn on the power and wait a while until capping is performed  
automatically.  
O When the power is on, do not remove the power plug or cut the power at the breaker.  
The print head may not be capped properly. In this case, turn on the power and wait a  
while until capping is performed automatically.  
O Even when the printer is not in use, some ink will be consumed by head cleaning and  
other maintenance operations needed to keep the print head in good condition.  
Note s whe n not using the p rinte r  
If you are not using it, note the following points when storing the printer. If it is not stored  
correctly, you may not be able to print properly the next time it is used.  
O If you do not print for a long time, the print head nozzles may become clogged. We  
recommend that you print once a week to prevent the print head from clogging.  
O The roller may leave an impression on paper that is left in the printer. This can also  
cause wavy or curled paper resulting in paper feeding problems or the print head could  
be scratched. Remove any paper when the printer is not in use.  
Introduction 24  
O Store the printer after confirming that the print head has been capped (the print head is  
positioned at the far right). If the print head is left uncapped for a long time, the print  
quality may decline.  
Note:  
If the print head is not capped, turn the printer on, and then turn it off.  
O To prevent the accumulation of dust and other foreign matter in the printer, close all  
covers before placing it in storage.  
If the printer will be not be used for an extended period, protect it with an anti-static cloth  
or other cover.  
The print head nozzles are very small, and they can become clogged easily if fine dust  
gets on the print head, and you may not be able to print properly.  
O When turned on after an extended period of disuse, the printer may automatically  
perform head cleaning to ensure print quality.  
Head cleaning will end after about 10 to 15 minutes.  
Note s on ha nd ling ink c a rtrid g e s  
Note the following points when handling ink cartridges to maintain good print quality.  
O The supplied ink cartridges and Maintenance Box are for use during the initial charging.  
The supplied ink cartridges and Maintenance Box will be require replacement relatively  
quickly.  
O Store the ink cartridges at room temperature out of direct sunlight and used before the  
expiration date printed on the packaging.  
O To ensure good results, use all the ink in the cartridge within a year of installation.  
O Ink cartridges that have been stored at low temperatures for an extended period should  
be allowed to return to room temperature over a period of four hours.  
O Do not touch the IC chips on the sides of ink cartridges. You may not be able to print  
properly.  
O Install all ink cartridges into each slot. You cannot print if any of the slots are empty.  
O Do not leave the printer without ink cartridges installed. The ink in the printer may dry,  
preventing it from printing as expected. Leave ink cartridges in all slots even while you  
do not use the printer.  
Introduction 25  
O The ink level and other data are stored in the IC chip, allowing cartridges to be used  
after being removed and replaced.  
O To avoid getting dirt on the ink supply port, store the removed ink cartridge properly.  
The ink supply port has a valve in it so it does not need to be capped.  
O Removed ink cartridges may have ink around the ink supply port, so be careful not to  
get any ink on the surrounding area when removing the cartridges.  
O To maintain the quality of the print head, this printer stops printing before ink cartridges  
are completely expended.  
O Although the ink cartridges may contain recycled materials, this does not affect printer  
function or performance.  
O Do not dismantle or remodel ink cartridges. You may not be able to print properly.  
O Do not drop or knock it against hard objects; otherwise, the ink may leak.  
Note s on ha nd ling p a p e r  
Note the following points when handling and storing the paper. If the paper is not in good  
condition, print quality may decline.  
Check the documentation supplied with each paper.  
Note s on Ha nd ling  
O Use Epson special media under normal room conditions (temperature: 59 to 77°F [15  
to 25°C]; humidity: 40 to 60%).  
O Do not fold the paper or scratch the surface of the paper.  
O Avoid touching the printable surface of the paper with your bare hands. Moisture and  
oils from your hands can affect print quality.  
O Handle paper by the edges. We recommend wearing cotton gloves.  
O Changes in temperature and humidity may cause paper to become wavy or curled. Be  
careful not to scratch or soil the paper, and flatten it before loading it in the printer.  
O Do not wet the paper.  
O Do not throw away the paper packaging as you can use it for storing the paper.  
O Avoid locations that are subject to direct sunlight, excessive heat, or humidity.  
Introduction 26  
O Keep cut sheets in their original package after opening, and keep them in a flat place.  
O Remove roll paper that is not in use from the printer. Rewind it correctly and then store  
it in the original packaging that came with the roll paper. If you leave the roll paper in the  
printer for a long time, its quality may decline.  
Note s on ha nd ling p rinte d p a p e r  
To maintain long lasting, high quality print results, note the following points.  
O Do not rub or scratch the printed surface. If they are rubbed or scratched, the ink may  
peel off.  
O Do not touch the printed surface; failure to observe this precaution may cause ink to rub  
off.  
O Make sure the printouts are completely dry before folding of stacking; otherwise, the  
color may change where they touch (leaves a mark). These marks will disappear if they  
are separated immediately and dried; however, they will remain if not separated.  
O If you put the printouts in an album before they are completely dry, they may be blurred.  
O Do not use a dryer to dry the printouts.  
O Avoid direct sunlight.  
O Prevent color distortion while displaying or storing the printouts by following the  
instructions in the paper’s documentation.  
Note:  
Typically, printouts and photos fade over time (color distortion) due to the effects of light and  
various constituents in the air. This also applies to Epson special media. However, with the  
correct storage method, the degree of color distortion can be minimized.  
O See the documentation supplied with Epson special media for detailed information on  
handling the paper after printing.  
O The colors of photos, posters, and other printed materials appear different under different  
lighting conditions (light sources*). The colors of printouts from this printer may also appear  
different under different light sources.  
* Light sources include sunlight, fluorescent light, incandescent light, and other types.  
Introduction 27  
Using the Sup p lie d Softwa re  
Conte nts of the Softwa re CD  
The following applications are available on the supplied software CD. Install as required.  
For information about these applications, see the on-line help for the application in  
question.  
For Windows  
Softwa re Na m e  
Ep so n Drive r a nd Utilitie s  
The fo llo wing so ftwa re is insta lle d :  
Printe r Drive r  
The p rinte r d rive r is re q uire d whe n using the p rinte r.  
It c a n b e insta lle d b y se le c ting Insta ll d uring se tup .  
Se e Sum m a ry o f the Printe r Drive r” o n p a g e 29.  
EPSON LFP Re m ote Pa ne l 2  
This a p p lic a tio n is use d fo r c usto m p a p e r se tting s a nd to up d a te p rinte r  
firm wa re .  
Ep so n Ne two rk Utilitie s  
Se le c t this o p tio n d uring insta lla tio n if the p rinte r a nd c o m p ute r a re  
c o nne c te d via a ne two rk. Insta lling this utility a llo ws a wiza rd to b e use d  
to sim p lify the p ro c e ss o f se tting the a d d re sse s ne e d e d fo r ne two rk  
c o nne c tio ns.  
Ep so nNe t Print is a lso insta lle d . With this so ftwa re , yo u c a n p e rfo rm  
d ire c t TC P/ IP p rinting whe n the c o m p ute r a nd the p rinte r a re  
c o nne c te d via a ne two rk.  
Ep so nNe t Co nfig  
With this so ftwa re , yo u c a n c o nfig ure va rio us ne two rk se tting s fo r the  
p rinte r fro m yo ur c o m p ute r. This is use ful a s it a llo ws yo u to e nte r  
a d d re sse s a nd na m e s using the ke yb o a rd .  
The d o c um e nta tio n is insta lle d with the a p p lic a tio n.  
LFP Print Plug -In fo r O ffic e  
This is a p lug -in fo r Mic ro so ft O ffic e a p p lic a tio ns (Wo rd , Exc e l, a nd  
Po we rPo int). Insta lling this p lug -in d isp la ys a rib b o n in Offic e  
a p p lic a tio ns tha t g ive s q uic k a c c e ss to ho rizo nta l a nd ve rtic a l b a nne r  
p rinting a nd e nla rg e d p rinting .  
Be fo re insta lling the p lug -in, c he c k the fo llo wing :  
O
O
Offic e 2003, Offic e 2007, o r Offic e 2010 is insta lle d .  
No ne o f the se a p p lic a tio ns (Offic e 2003, Offic e 2007, o r Offic e 2010)  
is running .  
This p lug -in is no t inc lud e d in so m e re g io ns.  
Introduction 28  
For Mac OS X  
Softwa re Na m e  
Ep so n Drive r a nd Utilitie s  
The fo llo wing so ftwa re is insta lle d :  
Printe r Drive r  
The p rinte r d rive r is re q uire d whe n using the p rinte r.  
It c a n b e insta lle d b y se le c ting Insta ll d uring se tup .  
Se e Sum m a ry o f the Printe r Drive r” o n p a g e 29.  
EPSON LFP Re m ote Pa ne l 2  
This a p p lic a tio n is use d fo r c usto m p a p e r se tting s a nd to up d a te p rinte r  
firm wa re .  
Ep so n Ne two rk Utilitie s  
Ep so nNe t Co nfig  
Se le c t this o p tio n d uring insta lla tio n if the p rinte r a nd c o m p ute r a re  
c o nne c te d via a ne two rk. Insta lling this utility a llo ws a wiza rd to b e use d  
to sim p lify the p ro c e ss o f se tting the a d d re sse s ne e d e d fo r ne two rk  
c o nne c tio ns.  
With this so ftwa re , yo u c a n c o nfig ure va rio us ne two rk se tting s fo r the  
p rinte r fro m yo ur c o m p ute r. This is use ful a s it a llo ws yo u to e nte r  
a d d re sse s a nd na m e s using the ke yb o a rd .  
The d o c um e nta tio n is insta lle d with the a p p lic a tio n.  
Sum m a ry of the Printe r Drive r  
The main functions of the printer driver are described below.  
O Converts print data received from applications into printable data and sends it to the  
printer.  
O Settings such as document size and print quality can be adjusted from the settings  
dialogs.  
Windows  
Introduction 29  
You can save these settings and easily import or export these saved settings.  
See “Customizing the Printer Driver” on page 150.  
Mac OS X  
O Allows the user to execute printer maintenance functions to maintain print quality, and  
check the printer’s status and so on.  
Windows  
You can easily import or export printer driver settings.  
Introduction 30  
See “Overview of the Utility Tab” on page 155.  
Mac OS X  
Introduction 31  
Cha p te r 2  
Ba sic Op e ra tions  
Loa d ing a nd Re m oving the Roll Pa p e r  
Loa d ing Roll Pa p e r  
Load roll paper after attaching the supplied roll paper adapters.  
Important:  
Insert the paper just before printing. The roller may leave an impression on paper that is left in  
the printer.  
Note:  
The paper that can be used in the printer is detailed in the following section. (See “Supported  
Media” on page 223.)  
1. Turn on the printer by pressing the P button.  
Note:  
Closing the paper basket makes the work easier. See “Using the Paper Basket” on  
page 58.  
Leaving the poster board supports raised can cause jams; lower all the supports  
before proceeding. To lower the supports, grasp them, pull them diagonally  
downward, and then release.  
Basic Operations 32  
2. Open the roll paper cover.  
3. Confirm that the adapter holder lock lever is raised.  
4. Place roll paper on the roll rest on top of the printer.  
Basic Operations 33  
5. Size the two supplied roll paper adapters to the roll core.  
3-inc h c ore  
2-inc h c ore  
6. Raise the adapter lock lever to release the lock on each of the two roll paper adapters.  
7. Attach an adapter to each end of the roll.  
Basic Operations 34  
Press the adapters in until they are fully inserted in the roll, with no gaps.  
8. Lower the lock levers to lock the adapters in place.  
9. Slide the roll paper right until it contacts the adapter guides.  
Following the adapter guide, slide the roll slowly to the opposite side.  
Basic Operations 35  
10.Press the ( button on the control panel. Confirm that Roll Paper is highlighted in the  
display and press the OK button.  
11.Insert the end of the roll paper in the paper slot and pull it through. Make sure that the  
paper is free of slack and that the end is not folded.  
Pull the paper straight through until the lead edge of the paper reaches the front of the  
printer as shown.  
Basic Operations 36  
Note:  
Do not touch the paper where it will be printed. After loading the roll paper, rotate the  
roll paper adapters as shown to feed the paper through.  
12.Lower the roll lock lever.  
13.Following the on-screen instructions, press the OK button.  
The paper will be fed into the printer.  
Basic Operations 37  
14.Close the roll paper cover.  
15.Check the media type.  
If a barcode giving information on the paper is printed on the roll  
The printer will automatically read the barcode as the paper is fed; no message is  
displayed. The printer is ready to print when Ready is displayed.  
If a barcode giving information on the paper is not printed on the roll  
The printer will display the Paper Type and Roll Paper Remaining settings for the paper  
currently selected with the printer. To print at current settings, press the d/u buttons to  
highlight Keep Settings Above and press the OK button. To change settings, highlight  
Change Settings and press the OK button. See “Viewing and Changing Media  
Settings” on page 53.  
Cutting the roll p a p e r  
Either of the following two methods can be used to cut roll paper after printing.  
O Auto Cut:  
Cut the roll paper after printing each page automatically using the built-in cutter.  
O Manual cut:  
Press the ) button to cut the paper using the built-in cutter. A cutline is printed for  
manual cutting and can be used as a guide when cutting paper using the built-in cutter.  
You can specify the method either from the control panel or the printer driver. Note,  
however, that the setting selected with the printer driver takes priority when the printer  
driver is used.  
Basic Operations 38  
Note:  
O Disable printer driver Auto Cut and printer Auto Cut options when using the optional auto  
take-up reel unit.  
O It may take a while to cut the roll paper.  
O Some of the roll paper may not be cut using the built-in cutter. Use a cutter sold at a store to  
cut the paper. Follow the steps below when using a third-party cutter.  
Press the ) button. Keep the d button pressed to feed the paper so that the cut location  
is below the paper eject guide. Cut the paper using scissors or a third-party cutter.  
Se tting m e thod s  
Setting on the computer  
Set Auto Cut from the Advanced tab - Roll Paper Option in the printer driver’s  
Properties (or Printing preferences) screen.  
Setting from the printer  
Use the l/r buttons in the control panel to select the / tab and press the OK or Menu  
button. The Setup menu will be displayed; select Printer Setup > Roll Paper Setup> Auto  
Cut > On and press the OK button. For manual cutting, select Off. The default setting is  
On. See “Setup menu” on page 175 for more information.  
Ma nua l c ut m e thod  
When Off is selected in the printer driver or Off is selected for Auto Cut in the control  
panel, the paper can be cut in any location after printing as described below.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
Basic Operations 39  
Cutting paper manually using the built-in cutter  
1. Press the ) button. Viewing the interior of the printer without opening the printer  
cover, press the d button to align the cut location with the  
mark on the right side of  
the printer’s interior.  
Note:  
The minimum length of paper that can be cut with the built-in cutter is fixed at 2.4 to  
5 inches (60 to 127 mm) and cannot be changed. If the cutting position is shorter than  
the shortest length above, the paper has to be automatically fed to that length thus a  
margin will have to be left. Cut off the margin with a cutter sold at a store.  
Basic Operations 40  
2. Press the OK button.  
The paper is cut by the built-in cutter.  
Re m oving the roll p a p e r  
This section describes how to remove and store roll paper after printing. The pressure  
rollers may leave impressions on paper that is left in the printer.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Confirm that the printer is ready and press the ( button.  
The Load/Remove Paper menu will be displayed.  
2. Press the d/u buttons to highlight Remove Paper and press the OK button.  
If On is selected for Roll Paper Remaining, the printer will automatically print a  
barcode.  
3. The paper will automatically be rewound.  
Once the paper is rewound, the printer will display Press  
and load paper.  
Note:  
When the display shows Turn roll paper adapter to wind up roll paper, open the  
roll paper cover and rewind the paper by hand.  
Basic Operations 41  
4. Open the roll paper cover.  
Note:  
When removing the roll paper, you can use the optional roll paper belt to prevent the  
roll paper from unwinding.  
5. Raise the roll lock lever.  
6. Holding the paper by the roll adapters, move the roll to the roll rest.  
Basic Operations 42  
7. Lift the adapter lock levers to release the roll paper adapters.  
8. Remove the roll paper adapters.  
After rewinding the roll paper carefully, store it in the original package.  
9. Close the roll paper cover.  
Loa d ing a nd Re m oving Cut She e ts  
The procedure for loading and positioning cut sheets varies with the thickness of the paper.  
See “Loading Cut Sheets” on page 44 (0.08 to 0.8 mm) or “Loading Poster Board” on page  
47 (0.9 to 2.1 mm) for more information.  
Important:  
If the paper is wavy or curled, flatten the paper before loading it in the printer, or use new paper.  
If wavy or curled paper is loaded, this printer may not be able to recognize the paper size, feed  
the paper, or print correctly.  
We recommend that you return the paper to its original package and store it flat, and take it out  
of the package just before you use it.  
Basic Operations 43  
Loa d ing Cut She e ts  
Important:  
Insert the paper just before printing. The pressure rollers may leave impressions on paper that is  
left in the printer.  
Note:  
The paper that can be used in the printer is detailed in the following section. See “Supported  
Media” on page 223.  
1. Turn on the printer by pressing the P button.  
Note:  
Closing the paper basket makes the work easier. See “Using the Paper Basket” on  
page 58.  
Leaving the poster board supports raised can cause jams; lower all the supports  
before proceeding. To lower the supports, grasp them, pull them diagonally  
downward, and then release.  
Basic Operations 44  
2. Press the ( button on the control panel. Press the d/u button to highlight Cut Sheet  
and press the OK button.  
3. Feed the paper into the paper slot with the printable surface toward you.  
Insert the paper into the paper slot, keeping its right edge aligned with the loading mark  
on the roll paper cover. Slide the paper in until it stops.  
Important:  
Insert all paper in portrait orientation. Inserting paper in landscape orientation may  
cause a decline in print quality.  
4. Confirm that Press OK is displayed and press the OK button.  
Basic Operations 45  
The paper will be fed into the printer.  
5. Check the media type.  
The display shows the type of paper currently selected with the printer. To print at  
current settings, press the d/u buttons to highlight Keep Settings Above and press  
the OK button. To change settings, highlight Change Settings and press the OK  
button. See “Viewing and Changing Media Settings” on page 53.  
Re m oving Cut She e ts  
This section describes how to remove cut sheets when printing is complete.  
Note:  
To remove paper that was loaded but not used, press the ( button and select Remove Paper.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Confirm that Paper Eject is displayed in the control panel. Then, keeping a hand on the  
cut sheets to prevent them falling from the printer, press the OK button.  
2. The paper will be fully ejected from the printer and can then be removed by hand.  
Basic Operations 46  
Loa d ing a nd Re m oving Poste r Boa rd  
This section describes how to load and remove poster board from 0.9 to 2.1 mm thick.  
The printer can be used with board of the following sizes.  
*
*
*
A2/A1/B2/B1 /B1 landscape /24 × 30 inch/30 × 40 inch  
* Not supported by the SureColor T3000.  
Loa d ing Poste r Boa rd  
Poster board requires space both behind and in front of the printer. The approximate  
amount of space required is shown below. If the printer is set up near a wall, make sure  
there is enough space at the rear.  
Pa p e r Size  
Front (a )  
17.5 inc he s (444 m m )  
Ba c k (b )  
5.3 inc he s (135 m m )  
A2  
A1  
27.2 inc he s (691 m m )  
22.7 inc he s (578 m m )  
34.6 inc he s (880 m m )  
24.1 inc he s (612 m m )  
34.1 inc he s (866 m m )  
15 inc he s (382 m m )  
10.6 inc he s (269 m m )  
22.5 inc he s (571 m m )  
11.9 inc he s (303 m m )  
21.9 inc he s (557 m m )  
B2  
B1  
24 × 30 inc h  
30 × 40 inc h  
Important:  
Insert the paper just before printing. The roller may leave an impression on paper that is left in  
the printer.  
Note:  
The paper that can be used in the printer is detailed in the following section. See “Supported  
Media” on page 223.  
Basic Operations 47  
1. Turn on the printer by pressing the P button.  
Note:  
Closing the paper basket makes the work easier. See “Using the Paper Basket” on  
page 58.  
2. Press the ( button in the control panel. Press the d/u button to highlight Poster  
Board and press the OK button.  
3. Raise all the poster board supports.  
Basic Operations 48  
Press the supports diagonally downwards and then lift them straight up.  
4. Place the printable side face up with its edge in front of the projecting supports as  
shown.  
Basic Operations 49  
5. Insert the poster board, using the edge to keep the supports pressed down.  
6. Open the printer cover.  
Basic Operations 50  
7. Insert the poster board, checking to be sure that it passes under the rollers.  
8. Close the printer cover.  
9. Position the trailing and right edges of the poster board as shown by the loading  
indicators.  
Center the right edge over the groove to the right of the paper eject guide and align the  
trailing edge with the ends of poster board supports, as shown.  
10.After positioning the media, press the OK button.  
Basic Operations 51  
The paper will be fed into the printer.  
11.Check the media type.  
The display shows the type of paper currently selected with the printer. To print at  
current settings, press the d/u buttons to highlight Keep Settings Above and press  
the OK button. To change settings, highlight Change Settings and press the OK  
button. See “Viewing and Changing Media Settings” on page 53.  
Re m oving Poste r Boa rd  
This section describes how to remove poster board when printing is complete.  
Note:  
To remove paper that was loaded but not used, press the ( button and select Remove Paper.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Confirm that Paper Eject is displayed in the control panel. Then, keeping a hand on the  
poster board to prevent it falling from the printer, press the OK button.  
2. Pull the poster board forward as shown in the on-screen instructions. After removing  
the poster board, press the OK button.  
Basic Operations 52  
Important:  
If poster board will not be used in the next print job, lower all the poster board  
supports. Leaving the supports raised may cause paper to jam.  
To lower the supports, grasp them as shown, pull them diagonally downward, and  
then release.  
Vie wing a nd Cha ng ing Me d ia Se tting s  
The following is displayed in the control panel after paper is loaded.  
Note:  
If On is selected for Roll Paper Remaining and a barcode with roll data is printed on the current  
roll, the printer will read the barcode and adjust settings automatically, and the above dialog will  
not be displayed.  
Basic Operations 53  
Che c king Me d ia Se tting s  
The dialog displays the following options for the paper currently loaded in the printer.  
Selected Paper Type:  
Remaining Setup:  
The current paper type.  
Displayed only with roll paper.  
This item shows the option currently selected for Roll Paper Remaining.  
When On is selected for Roll Paper Remaining, the printer tracks the following roll paper  
data.  
O Time until replacement  
The following settings are recorded in a barcode printed on the roll: the amount of paper  
remaining, the value selected for remaining alert, and the paper type.  
The barcode is automatically printed at the end of the roll when the roll is rewound. The  
barcode is automatically read and settings adjusted the next time the paper is used,  
improving efficiency when multiple rolls of paper are used.  
O The amount of paper remaining in the . tab info display area  
The info display area shows the amount of paper remaining in the current roll. Once the  
amount of paper remaining falls below the limit, the amount is replaced by a warning  
indicator showing that paper is running low. See “Screen View” on page 17.  
O Printing availability  
The printer predicts whether the current job can be printed on the amount of paper  
remaining and displays the results, preventing waste caused by the paper running out  
part way through a print job. This allows you to choose whether to print on the existing  
roll or replace the paper, preventing waste.  
Basic Operations 54  
Ad justing Se tting s  
Follow the steps below to change the settings displayed.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Select an option.  
To print at current settings  
Press the d/u buttons to highlight Keep Settings Above and press the OK button.  
Then proceed to step 6.  
To change settings  
Press the d/u buttons to highlight Change Settings and press the OK button.  
2. Highlight a setting you wish to change and press the OK button.  
3. Highlight an option and press the OK button.  
4. Press the y button to return to the dialog shown in step 2.  
5. When settings are complete, highlight Exit and press the OK button.  
6. If On is selected for Remaining Setup, you will be prompted to enter the length of the  
roll. Press the d/u buttons to choose a value between 16 and 326 feet (5.0 and 99.5 m)  
and press the OK button. Paper length is set in increments of 1 foot (0.5 m).  
After a short pause the printer will show Ready, indicating that it is ready to print. Transmit  
the data to be printed from a computer.  
Basic Operations 55  
Re p la c ing Pa p e r  
This section describes how to replace paper. The process for removing the current paper  
differs with the type of paper loaded; follow the instructions displayed in the control panel.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Confirm that the printer is ready and press the ( button.  
The Load/Remove Paper menu will be displayed.  
2. Press the d/ubuttons to select the type of paper used to replace the current paper, and  
then press the OK button.  
3. The printer will eject the current paper. The process for ejecting the paper varies with  
the type of paper loaded, as described below.  
If On is selected for Roll Paper Remaining, barcode printing will begin; when printing  
is complete, the roll will rewind automatically.  
If Off is selected for Roll Paper Remaining, the roll rewinds automatically.  
Note:  
When the display shows Turn roll paper adapter to wind up roll paper, open the  
roll paper cover and rewind the paper by hand.  
Basic Operations 56  
Cut Sheets  
Cut sheets are automatically ejected to the rear, where they can be removed by hand.  
Poster Board  
Poster board is partially ejected to the front. Supporting the board with one hand to  
prevent it from falling, press the OK button and pull out the board.  
If the next job will not use poster board, lower all the poster board supports. Leaving the  
supports raised may cause paper to jam.  
To lower the supports, grasp them as shown, pull them diagonally downward, and then  
release.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to load the paper for the next job.  
Basic Operations 57  
Using the Pa p e r Ba ske t  
The paper basket collects paper from the printer, preventing it from falling to the floor and  
becoming creased or dirty.  
The stand (24”) for the SureColor T3000 comes with a paper basket.  
It can hold up to 20 sheets of the following types of paper printed in line drawing mode.  
Pa p e r Size  
Me d ia typ e s  
A1 (594 × 841 m m )  
US D (22 × 34 in)  
A0 (841 × 1189 m m )  
Pla in Pa p e r Ro ll  
*
*
US E (34 × 44 in)  
* Not supported by the SureColor T3000.  
Paper not of the above types must be removed from the printer one at a time before the  
next sheet is printed.  
Important:  
Collecting consecutive sheets of other types in the paper basket may result in stains, folds, or  
other damage to the printed sheets.  
The paper basket can hold sheets up to 47 inches (1189 mm) long.  
Note:  
Close the paper basket before printing banners or other documents that exceed the maximum  
length. Before the paper ejected from the printer touches the floor, we suggest that you take it in  
both hands close to the paper eject guides and continue to lightly support it until printing is  
complete.  
Basic Operations 58  
Closing the Paper Basket  
Before loading paper or moving the printer, close the paper basket by pressing it to the  
opposite side as shown.  
Opening the Paper Basket  
If the paper basket is closed, open it by gently pulling it down as shown.  
Basic Operations 59  
Important:  
The paper basket will not function correctly when opened to the position shown below at right.  
Stop when the paper basket is in the position shown below at left.  
Using the Paper Basket  
Adjust the stack guide to match the size of the paper.  
Note:  
The paper basket may with some documents or in some environments fail to hold the paper  
correctly, resulting in the paper wrinkling or folding.  
Basic Operations 60  
Using the Auto Ta ke -up Re e l Unit (Sure Color T7000 Only)  
The optional auto take-up reel unit automatically takes up paper as it is printed. It improves  
efficiency for banners or large jobs involving continuous printing on roll paper.  
The auto take-up reel unit for this printer can take up paper in either of the directions shown  
below. Some types of paper may not support one or the other of these directions or may  
place restrictions on the take-up direction.  
See the following section for information on take-up support and take-up direction. See  
“Epson Special Media Table” on page 224.  
Fo rwa rd  
Ba c kwa rd  
Forward takes up the roll with the printable side out. Backward takes up the roll with the  
printable side in.  
Caution:  
O Fix the roll core for the auto take-up reel unit in place as described in the  
c
documentation.  
O Dropping the roll core could cause injury.  
O Be careful that your hands, hair, or other objects do not get caught in the moving  
parts of the auto take-up reel unit.  
O Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury.  
Important:  
Confirm that the end of the roll is cut straight across. The unit will not function as expected if the  
end of the roll is wavy or curved. See “Manual cut method” on page 39.  
Note:  
For information on installing the auto take-up reel unit, see the documentation supplied with the  
auto take-up reel unit attachment.  
Basic Operations 61  
Using the Control Pa ne l  
This section describes how to use the control panel for the auto take-up reel unit.  
1
Powe r la m p  
Disp la ys the sta tus o f the a uto ta ke -up re e l unit.  
On  
:
:
:
:
:
The a uto ta ke -up re e l unit is re a d y fo r use .  
The a uto ta ke -up re e l unit is in use .  
The a uto ta ke -up re e l unit is in p o we r-sa ving m o d e .  
An e rro r ha s o c c urre d .  
Flic ke ring  
Blinking  
Inte rm itte nt b linking  
Off  
The p o we r is o ff.  
2
Auto switc h  
Se le c ts the a uto ta ke -up d ire c tio n.  
Ba c kwa rd  
Fo rwa rd  
:
:
:
The ro ll is ta ke n up with the p rinta b le sid e in.  
The ro ll is ta ke n up with the p rinta b le sid e o ut.  
The a uto ta ke -up re e l unit d o e s no t ta ke up p a p e r.  
Off  
3
Ma nua l switc h  
Se le c ts the m a nua l ta ke -up d ire c tio n.  
The se tting se le c te d with the Ma nua l switc h ta ke s e ffe c t whe n the Auto switc h is in the O ff  
p o sitio n.  
Ba c kwa rd  
Fo rwa rd  
:
:
The ro ll is ta ke n up with the p rinta b le sid e in.  
The sp e e d will inc re a se a fte r the b utto n is p re sse d fo r  
m o re tha n thre e se c o nd s.  
The ro ll is ta ke n up with the p rinta b le sid e o ut.  
The sp e e d will inc re a se a fte r the b utto n is p re sse d fo r  
m o re tha n thre e se c o nd s.  
Basic Operations 62  
Atta c hing the Pa p e r  
This section describes how to attach roll paper to the auto take-up reel unit roll core. The  
procedure varies with the take-up direction.  
Important:  
Before proceeding, select Off for Auto Cut. Using the auto take-up reel unit when On is selected  
will cause errors. See “Cutting the roll paper” on page 38.  
Ta king Up the Pa p e r Printa b le Sid e Out  
For information on installing the roll core, see the Setup Guide for the optional auto take-up  
reel unit.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
Basic Operations 63  
1. Set the auto take-up reel unit Auto switch to Off. Plug the power cord into an outlet and  
confirm that the power lamp lights.  
2. Turn on the printer by pressing the P button.  
3. Check that the roll paper is correctly loaded in the printer.  
4. Press the ) button in the control panel. Keep the d button pressed until the end of  
the roll reaches the roll core.  
5. Tape the end to the roll core. Place tape at the center and then at the left and right ends.  
6. Keep the d button in the control panel pressed until you have fed enough paper for  
about three wraps around the roll core.  
Basic Operations 64  
7. Keep the Manual switch pressed to Forward to wrap the paper three times around the  
core.  
After wrapping the paper around the core, ensure that paper around the core is  
sufficiently loose.  
Note:  
The tensioner supplied with the auto take-up reel unit is used with some types of  
paper. Slacken the paper and insert the tensioner near the center of the paper as  
shown. See the following section for information on paper that requires the  
tensioner. See “Epson Special Media Table” on page 224.  
Basic Operations 65  
8. Set the Auto switch to Forward.  
Ta king Up the Pa p e r Printa b le Sid e In  
For information on installing the roll core, see the Setup Guide for the optional auto take-up  
reel unit.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
Basic Operations 66  
1. Set the auto take-up reel unit Auto switch to Off. Plug the power cord into an outlet and  
confirm that the power lamp lights.  
2. Turn on the printer by pressing the P button.  
3. Check that the roll paper is correctly loaded in the printer.  
4. Press the ) button in the control panel. Keep the d button pressed until the end of  
the roll reaches the roll core.  
5. Tape the end to the roll core. Place tape at the center and then at the left and right ends.  
6. Keep the d button in the control panel pressed until you have fed enough paper for  
about three wraps around the roll core.  
Basic Operations 67  
7. Keep the Manual switch pressed to Backward to wrap the paper three times around the  
core.  
After wrapping the paper around the core, ensure that paper around the core is  
sufficiently loose.  
8. Set the Auto switch to Backward.  
Basic Operations 68  
Re m oving Pa p e r from the Auto Ta ke -up Re e l Unit  
This section describes how to remove paper from the auto take-up reel unit.  
Caution:  
Removing paper from the auto take-up reel unit requires two workers, one on each end  
of the roll. A single worker working alone could drop the roll, resulting in injury.  
c
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Set the Auto switch to Off.  
2. Cut the paper and take it up until it is all on the auto take-up reel unit roll core. See  
“Manual cut method” on page 39.  
Basic Operations 69  
After cutting the paper, support the end to prevent the printed surface touching the floor;  
continue to support the paper until it is all taken up. Keep the Manual switch pressed in  
the take-up direction (either Forward or Backward).  
3. Unlock the movable unit and remove it from the roll core. When removing the movable  
unit, support the roll core with one hand to prevent it from falling to the floor.  
4. Remove the roll core from the auto take-up reel unit.  
Basic Operations 70  
Ba sic Printing Me thod s (Wind ows)  
Printing is performed from the application used to create the document you wish to print.  
The basic procedure is described below.  
1. Turn on the printer, and load the paper.  
See “Loading Roll Paper” on page 32, “Loading Cut Sheets” on page 44, or “Loading  
Poster Board” on page 47 for more information.  
2. When you have created the data, click Print in the File menu.  
3. After confirming that the printer is selected, click Printer properties or Properties to  
display the Printer Settings tab.  
Basic Operations 71  
4. Check the options selected for Media Settings.  
On startup, the printer driver automatically downloads information on the media in the  
printer and displays it in the Media Settings area.  
To print at current settings, proceed to the next step.  
If the desired settings are not displayed, replace the media in the printer with the  
desired paper type and click the Acquire Info button. The driver will reacquire data  
from the printer and update the information displayed in the Media Settings area.  
Basic Operations 72  
5. In the Size Settings area, choose the desired Paper Size.  
Choose the Paper Size selected when the document was created in the application.  
If the desired size is not available in the menu, click Custom Paper Size to add a  
custom paper size. See “Printing at Non-Standard Sizes” on page 100.  
6. Select “fit to” and borderless printing options.  
To resize the document to fit it to the width of the roll when using roll paper, simply  
select Fit to Roll Paper Width.  
To print without borders (margins), select Borderless.  
For borderless printing on paper larger than the original document size, select both the  
“fit to” and borderless options.  
Basic Operations 73  
Advanced fit and borderless settings are available in the Layout tab.  
See “Enlargements and Horizontal and Vertical Banners” on page 92 and “Borderless  
Printing” on page 106.  
7. In the Print Quality area, choose an option for Select Target.  
Choose an option according to the type of document and how it will be used.  
To choose a color correction method or adjust colors, select Advanced Settings. See  
“Correct Color and Print” on page 113.  
8. Check settings.  
The selected settings are reflected in the area on the right; check that settings are  
correct.  
Basic Operations 74  
9. Click the OK button.  
10.When settings are complete, click Print.  
The progress bar is displayed, and printing starts.  
Screen while printing  
The following screen is displayed when you start printing, and the progress bar (the  
computer’s processing status) is displayed. On this screen you can check the remaining  
ink level, product numbers for the ink cartridges, and so on.  
Basic Operations 75  
An error message is displayed if an error occurs or an ink cartridge needs replacing while  
printing.  
Ba sic Printing Me thod s (Ma c OS X)  
1. Turn on the printer, and load the paper.  
See “Loading Roll Paper” on page 32, “Loading Cut Sheets” on page 44, or “Loading  
Poster Board” on page 47.  
2. When you have created the data, from the File menu of the application, click Print and  
so on.  
Basic Operations 76  
3. The print screen is displayed.  
For Mac OS X 10.7 or higher, click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog.  
For Mac OS X 10.6 and 10.5, click the arrow ( ) to make settings on the Page Setup  
screen.  
Basic Operations 77  
Note:  
If page settings are not displayed in the print dialog, click the “page settings” option  
(e.g., Page Setup) in the File menu.  
4. Check that this printer is selected, and then set the paper size.  
Select one of the following options for Paper Size. XXXX is the actual paper size, such  
as A4.  
XXXX: Print with margins on roll paper. Print using the Roll Paper Margin selected on  
the printer. See “Print Queues menu” on page 170.  
XXXX (cut sheet): Print with margins on cut sheets. Print with top, right, and left margins  
of 0.1 inches (3 mm) and a bottom margin of 0.5 inches (14 mm).  
When performing borderless or banner printing; see “Borderless Printing” on page 106,  
and “Enlargements and Horizontal and Vertical Banners” on page 92.  
5. To view basic print settings, select Printer Settings from the list.  
In Mac OS X versions 10.8, 10.7 and 10.6, the printer driver automatically acquires  
information on the paper loaded in the printer at startup and displays it in the Page  
Setup and Media Type areas. To print at current settings, proceed to the next step.  
Basic Operations 78  
In Mac OS X version 10.5, choose Page Setup and the Media Type according to the  
type of paper loaded in the printer.  
If the desired settings are not displayed, replace the media in the printer with the  
desired paper type and click the Acquire Info button. The driver will reacquire data  
from the printer and update the information displayed.  
6. Choose how the printed document will be used. Then choose an option according to the  
type of document and how it will be used.  
To choose a color correction method or adjust colors, select Advanced Settings for  
Mode. See “Correct Color and Print” on page 113.  
Basic Operations 79  
7. Check settings.  
The selected settings are reflected in the area on the right; check that settings are  
correct.  
8. When settings are complete, click Print.  
The printer icon is displayed in the Dock while printing. Click the printer icon to display  
the status. You can check the progress of the current print job and the printer status  
information. You can also cancel a print job.  
Also, if an error occurs while printing,  
a
notification message is displayed.  
Basic Operations 80  
Printa b le Are a  
This section describes the printable areas for the printer.  
If the margin set in an application is larger than the following setting values, sections  
beyond the specified margins are not printed. For example, if 1.5 cm (15 mm) is selected  
for the left and right margins in the printer menus and the document fills the page, the  
1.5 cm (15 mm) at the left and right sides of the page will not be printed.  
Roll Pa p e r Printa b le Are a  
The gray area in the illustration below shows the printable area.  
When printing borderless on the left and right, the left and right margins are 0 mm. When  
printing borderless on all edges, all margins are 0 mm.  
The arrow in the illustration indicates the direction of the ejected paper.  
10 ~ 44 inches (254 ~ 1118 mm)*1  
10 ~ 36 inches (254 ~ 914 mm)*2  
10 ~ 24 inches (254 ~ 620 mm)*3  
0.1 ~ 0.6 inches (3 ~ 15 mm)  
0.1 ~ 0.6 inches (3 ~ 15 mm)  
0.1 ~ 0.6 inches (3 ~ 15 mm)  
4
C
D
B
4
A
0.1 ~ 0.8 inches (3 ~ 45 mm)  
*1 SureColor T7000  
*2 SureColor T5000  
*3 SureColor T3000  
*4 If Banner is selected for Roll Paper Option in the  
printer driver Advanced tab, the top and bottom margins  
are 0 mm.  
Margins for roll paper depend on the option selected for Roll Paper Margin in the menus,  
as shown in the following table. For Roll Paper Margin Settings, see “Setup menu” on  
page 175.  
The default setting is Normal.  
Basic Operations 81  
Roll Pa p e r Ma rg in Pa ra m e te r  
Ma rg in Va lue s  
*
No rm a l  
1, 3 = 15 m m  
2, 4 = 3 m m  
1, 3 = 15 m m  
2, 4 = 3 m m  
1 = 35 m m  
To p 15 m m / Bo tto m 15 m m  
To p 35 m m / Bo tto m 15 m m  
3 = 15 m m  
2, 4 = 3 m m  
1 = 45 m m  
To p 45 m m / Bo tto m 15 m m  
3 = 15 m m  
2, 4 = 3 m m  
1, 2, 3, 4, = 3 m m  
1, 2, 3, 4, = 15 m m  
3 m m  
15 m m  
* When Normal is selected, the value for 1 is 20 mm for the following paper types: Premium Glossy Photo  
Paper (250)/Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250)/Premium Luster Photo Paper (260)/Premium Semimatte  
Photo Paper (260)  
When the following media type is used in CAD / Line Drawing mode, the value for 1 and 3 is 3 mm:  
Singleweight Matte Paper.  
Important:  
Printing is distorted when the trailing edge of the roll paper comes off the core. Make sure the  
trailing edge does not come inside the printing area.  
The print size does not change even when the margins are changed.  
Basic Operations 82  
Cut She e ts Printa b le Are a  
When printing borderless on the left and right, the left and right margins are 0 mm.  
(Borderless printing is not available with poster board.)  
The arrow in the illustration indicates the direction of the ejected paper.  
8.3 ~ 17 inches  
(210 ~ 432 mm)  
0.5 inches (14 mm)  
0.1 inches (3 mm)  
Turning Off the Powe r Using Powe r Off Tim e r  
The printer offers the following two power management options:  
O Sleep mode  
The printer enters sleep mode when there are no errors, no print jobs being received,  
and no control panel or other operations performed. When the printer enters sleep  
mode, the control panel’s screen turns off and the internal motors and other parts  
switch off to consume less power.  
Press any button in the control panel to reactivate the display. However, under these  
conditions, the screen display turns off again after 30 seconds if no operations are  
performed. The printer only exits sleep mode and is completely restored to normal  
operation when a print job is received or the cover is opened or another hardware  
operation is performed. The delay before the printer enters sleep mode can be selected  
from values between 5 and 180 minutes. At default settings, the printer enters sleep  
mode if no operations are performed for 15 minutes. The delay can be changed from  
the Setup menu (see “Setup menu” on page 175).  
Note:  
When the printer enters sleep mode, the control panel’s screen goes blank as if the power  
has been turned off, but the P light remains lit.  
Basic Operations 83  
O Power Off Timer  
The printer is equipped with a Power Off Timer option that automatically turns the  
printer off if no errors occur, no print jobs are received, and no control panel or other  
operations are performed for a set period of time. The delay before the printer turns off  
automatically can be selected from values between 1 and 24 hours in increments of 1  
hour.  
At default settings, the printer turns off automatically if no errors occur, no print jobs are  
received, and no control panel or other operations are performed for eight hours. Power  
Off Timer settings can be adjusted from the Setup menu (see “Setup menu” on page  
175).  
About Power Management  
You can adjust the time before Power Management is applied. Any increase will affect the  
printer’s energy efficiency. Please consider the environment before making any change.  
Ca nc e ling Printing  
There are a few ways to stop printing operations depending on the situation.  
When the computer has finished sending data to the printer, you cannot cancel the print job  
from the computer. Cancel on the printer.  
Ca nc e ling from the c om p ute r (Wind ows)  
When the Progress Bar is displayed  
Click Cancel.  
Basic Operations 84  
When the Progress Bar is not displayed  
1. Click the printer icon in the task bar while printing is in progress.  
Whether or not an icon is displayed depends on the settings selected for Windows.  
2. Right click the name of the job you want to cancel and select Cancel from the document  
menu.  
To cancel all jobs, click Cancel All Documents in the Printer menu.  
If the job has been sent to the printer, print data is not displayed on the above screen.  
Ca nc e ling from the c om p ute r (Ma c OS X)  
1. Click the printer icon in the Dock.  
2. Select the job you want to cancel, and then click Delete.  
If the job has been sent to the printer, print data is not displayed on the above screen.  
Basic Operations 85  
Ca nc e ling on the p rinte r  
Press the W button, select Job Cancel on the screen, and then press the OK button.  
The print job is canceled even in the middle of printing. It may take a while before the  
printer returns to ready status after canceling a job.  
Note:  
You cannot delete print jobs which are in the print queue on the computer using the above  
operation. See "Canceling from the computer" to delete print jobs in the print queue.  
Basic Operations 86  
Cha p te r 3  
Using the Op tiona l Ha rd Disk Unit  
The Purp ose of the Ha rd Disk Unit  
When an optional hard disk unit is connected, print jobs can be viewed and managed as  
described below.  
Print Job Management  
O From the Print Queues menu  
For more information, see “Viewing and Printing Saved Print Jobs” on page 91.  
O From Remote Manager  
The Remote Manager utility is included in the standard installation of the printer  
network interface and, in addition to managing the print jobs stored on the hard disk  
unit, can be used for viewing printer status and adjusting network settings. It is  
launched by entering the printer’s IP address in a computer web browser.  
For more information, see the online help for Remote Manager. For information on  
launching Remote Manager see the Network Guide (pdf).  
O From LFP HDD Utility (Windows only)  
The LFP HDD Utility can be used to manage print jobs stored on a hard disk unit  
connected to the printer. It is used when the printer is connected to the computer via  
USB and can be downloaded from the Epson website (http://www.epson.com/support).  
Using the Optional Hard Disk Unit 87  
Hard Disk Unit Functions  
When an optional hard disk unit is installed, print jobs can be viewed and managed as  
described below.  
O Viewing Print Jobs  
When there are multiple print jobs with some in the queue, the following information can  
be displayed.  
O Print start time  
O Estimated print time  
O Other information, including whether the job can be printed without replacing  
consumables  
Print jobs can be selected and cancelled in Remote Manager or the LFP HDD Utility.  
O Viewing and Resuming Held Print Jobs  
If the source selected with the printer differs from the source specified in the print job,  
an error will occur and printing will be suspended.  
When an error occurs, printing cannot be restarted until the printer has been readied by,  
for example, replacing the paper.  
When an optional hard disk unit is installed, the following types of print job can be held  
temporarily.  
O Print jobs that specify sources that differ from that selected with the printer  
O Print jobs that specify paper types that differ from that selected with the printer  
O Print jobs that specify output paper sizes (widths) that differ from that selected with  
the printer  
After printing all the jobs that can be printed with the current paper, you can replace the  
paper with the media specified in the held print jobs and resume printing, making your  
work more efficient.  
Individual jobs can be selected and resumed or cancelled in Remote Manager or the  
LFP HDD Utility.  
Note:  
Held print jobs can be saved if On is selected for Store Held Job in the control panel  
Setup menu. The factory default setting is Off.  
See “Setup menu” on page 175.  
Using the Optional Hard Disk Unit 88  
O Viewing and Printing Stored Jobs  
Print jobs can be stored on the hard disk unit and printed at a later date.  
Print jobs selected for printing at a later date can be printed directly from the hard disk  
unit without increasing the load on your computer.  
Print jobs are saved using the printer driver. See “Saving Print Jobs to the Hard Disk  
Unit” on page 89.  
Note:  
Enlarged copy print jobs created with a scanner attached to the printer cannot be  
saved to the hard disk unit.  
Jobs printed from the following applications are always saved to the hard disk unit.  
O LFP Print Plug-In for Office  
O EPSON CopyFactory5  
For information on other applications, see the software documentation or online  
help.  
Sa ving Print Job s to the Ha rd Disk Unit  
This section describes the print driver settings used to save print jobs.  
1. When you have created the data, click Print in the File menu.  
Using the Optional Hard Disk Unit 89  
2. After confirming that the printer is selected, click Printer properties or Properties to  
display printer settings.  
3. In the Advanced tab, click the Settings button in the Hard Disk Unit area and select  
Print and Save or Save only.  
4. Next, print the document normally.  
If Save only is selected, the print job will be saved to the optional hard disk unit but not  
printed.  
Using the Optional Hard Disk Unit 90  
Vie wing a nd Printing Sa ve d Print Job s  
This section describes how to view and print saved jobs from the control panel.  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Confirm that the printer is ready to print. Press the l/r buttons to highlight , and press  
the OK button.  
The Print Queues menu will be displayed.  
2. Press the d/u buttons to highlight Saved Job Queue and press the OK button.  
The print job tab info display area shows the names of stored print jobs.  
3. Press the d/u buttons to highlight the desired job and press the OK button.  
Information on the selected job will be displayed.  
To exit without printing the job, press the W button after viewing job data.  
To print the job, proceed to step 4.  
4. Press the OK button.  
You will be prompted to enter the number of copies.  
5. Press the d/u buttons to choose the number of copies and press the OK button.  
Using the Optional Hard Disk Unit 91  
Cha p te r 4  
More Wa ys to Print  
Enla rg e m e nts a nd Horizonta l a nd Ve rtic a l Ba nne rs  
The printer driver can enlarge or reduce documents for different paper sizes. There are  
three setting methods.  
Before printing at non-standard sizes, including vertical or horizontal banners and  
documents with equal sides, enter the desired paper size in the printer driver.  
See “Printing at Non-Standard Sizes” on page 100.  
O Fit to Roll Paper Width  
Automatically enlarges or reduces the image size to fit the roll paper width.  
O Specify Size  
You can specify the enlargement or reduction ratio. Use this method for a non-standard  
paper size.  
A4  
1000mm  
More Ways to Print 92  
O Fit to Output Size  
Automatically enlarges or reduces the image size to fit the paper size.  
Note:  
O When printing from applications designed expressly for horizontal or vertical banners, adjust  
printer driver settings as described in the application documentation.  
O When using Windows applications designed for horizontal or vertical banners, select Banner  
in the Advanced tab as required.  
Fitting Doc um e nts to the Wid th of the Roll Pa p e r  
Wind ows  
1. Display the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab and select a Paper Size that matches  
the document page size.  
More Ways to Print 93  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
2. In the Layout tab, select Reduce/Enlarge and click Fit to Roll Paper Width.  
3. Choose whether to fit the short or long edge of the document to the roll paper width.  
More Ways to Print 94  
Note:  
Output can also be fitted to the roll width by selecting Fit to Roll Paper Width in the  
Printer Settings tab.  
4. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Ma c OS X  
1. Choose Page Layout Settings from the list in the print dialog and select  
Reduce/Enlarge.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
2. Select Fit to Roll Paper Width and choose whether to fit the short or long edge of the  
document to the roll paper width.  
3. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
More Ways to Print 95  
Choosing a Print Size  
Wind ows  
1. Display the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab and select a Paper Size that matches  
the document page size.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
2. In the Layout tab, select Reduce/Enlarge and click Specify Size.  
3. Choose an input method and select a size.  
More Ways to Print 96  
Enter a value directly or click the arrows to the right of the scale box to set the value.  
4. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Ma c OS X  
1. Choose Page Layout Settings from the list in the print dialog and select  
Reduce/Enlarge.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
2. Select Specify Size, choose a method for specifying the size, and select a size.  
Enter a value directly or click the arrows to the right of the scale box to set the value.  
3. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
More Ways to Print 97  
Fitting Doc um e nts to the Outp ut Size  
Wind ows  
1. Display the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab and select a Paper Size that matches  
the document page size.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
2. In the Layout tab, select Reduce/Enlarge and click Fit to Output Size.  
3. Select the size of the paper used for printing.  
To print the document, margins excluded, at precisely the selected output size, select  
Oversize.  
Note:  
When printing using Oversize, load paper that is as large as the selected Output  
Size plus the margins needed by the printer. Printer margins see “Printable Area” on  
page 81.  
More Ways to Print 98  
4. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Ma c OS X  
1. Choose Page Layout Settings from the list in the print dialog and select  
Reduce/Enlarge.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
2. Select Fit to Output Size and choose a paper size that matches the paper in the  
printer.  
3. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Note:  
Output can also be fitted to the paper size by selecting Scale to fit paper size in the print dialog  
Paper Handling pane.  
More Ways to Print 99  
Printing a t Non-Sta nd a rd Size s  
Before printing at non-standard sizes, including vertical or horizontal banners and  
documents with equal sides, save the desired paper size in the printer driver. Once they  
have save in the printer driver, custom sizes can be selected in the application Page Setup  
and other print dialogs.  
The following sizes can be used.  
Wid th  
Sure C o lo r T7000  
Sure C o lo r T5000  
Sure C o lo r T3000  
3.5 to 44 inc he s (89 to 1,118 m m )  
3.5 to 36 inc he s (89 to 914 m m )  
*1  
3.5 to 24 inc he s (89 to 620 m m )  
*2  
Le ng th  
Wind o ws: 5 to 590 inc he s (127 to 15000 m m )  
Ma c OS X: 5 to 600 inc he s (127 to 15240 m m )  
*1  
*2  
The maximum printable width is 24 inches (610 mm).  
The paper length can be longer if using applications that support banner printing. However, the actual print  
size depends on the application, the paper size loaded in the printer, and the computer environment.  
Important:  
The smallest size supported by the printer is 10 inches (254 mm) wide × 5 inches (127 mm) long.  
If a smaller size is entered in the printer driver as a Custom Paper Size, the document will print  
with wider-than-expected margins, which must be trimmed.  
For Mac OS X Custom Paper Sizes, although you can specify a large paper size which cannot  
be loaded on this printer, it will not be printed properly.  
The available output size is limited depending on the application.  
More Ways to Print 100  
Wind ows  
1. Display the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab and click the Custom Paper Size.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
Important:  
Custom Paper Size is not available when Front - Poster Board is selected for  
Source.  
2. Enter the desired size in the User Defined Paper Size dialog and click Save.  
O You can enter up to 24 single-byte characters for the Paper Size Name.  
O To view Paper Width and Paper Height values for a standard size close to the  
desired custom size, select the appropriate option for Base Paper Size.  
O If you specify the desired Fix Aspect Ratio and select Landscape or Portrait for  
Base, you need only enter either the Paper Width or Paper Height.  
More Ways to Print 101  
Note:  
To change the paper size you saved, select the paper size name from the list on the  
left.  
To delete the user-defined size you saved, select the paper size name from the list  
on the left, and then click Delete.  
You can save up to 100 paper sizes.  
3. Click OK.  
The saved sizes are now available in the Printer Settings dialog Paper Size menu.  
Ma c OS X  
1. When the Print screen is displayed, select Manage Custom Sizes from the Paper Size  
list.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
Note:  
If page setting options are not available in the application’s print dialog, display the  
page settings dialog.  
2. Click +, and then enter the paper size name.  
More Ways to Print 102  
3. Enter the Width, Height for the Paper Size, and enter the margins, and then click OK.  
The range of values available for page sizes and margins vary with the printer model  
and the values selected with the printer.  
See “Printable Area” on page 81.  
Note:  
To edit a saved custom size, choose its name from the list on the left.  
To copy a saved custom size, select the size in the list on the left and click Duplicate.  
To delete a saved custom size, select it in the list on the left and click -.  
The custom paper size setting differs depending on the operating system version.  
See your operating system’s documentation for details.  
4. Click OK.  
You can select the paper size you saved from the Paper Size pop-up menu.  
More Ways to Print 103  
Printing CAD Dra wing s  
The printer supports the HP-GL/2 driver and HP RTL (Raster Transfer Language) used in  
plotters. When printing CAD drawings in applications that support HP-GL/2 or HP RTL  
output, set plotter output to HP-GL/2 or HP RTL. The printer automatically distinguishes  
HP-GL/2 or HP RTL from normal printer inputs and adjusts its behavior accordingly.  
Important:  
The printer may not perform as expected if the volume of the data to be printed is extremely  
large.  
If the application does not support HP-GL/2 or HP RTL, use the following settings when  
printing CAD drawings and other line drawings.  
Wind ows  
1. Display the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab, click Select Target for Print Quality  
and select either CAD / Line Drawing (Black) or CAD / Line Drawing (Color).  
Note:  
The CAD / Line Drawing (Black) and CAD / Line Drawing (Color) options are  
available for Select Target when a paper type suited to printing CAD drawings is  
selected.  
2. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
More Ways to Print 104  
Ma c OS X  
1. Display the print dialog and select Printer Settings from the list.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
2. Click the Select Target for Mode and select CAD/Line Drawing(Black) or CAD/Line  
Drawing(Color).  
Note:  
The CAD/Line Drawing(Black) and CAD/Line Drawing(Color) options are  
available for Select Target when a paper type suited to printing CAD drawings is  
selected.  
3. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
More Ways to Print 105  
Bord e rle ss Printing  
You can print your data without margins on the paper.  
The types of borderless printing you can choose vary as shown below depending on the  
media type.  
Roll Paper: No margins for all edges, no margins for the left and right  
Cut Sheets: No margins for the left and right only  
(Borderless printing is not available with poster board.)  
When printing borderless for all edges you can also configure the cutting operation. See  
“About Roll Paper Cutting” on page 108.  
When performing left and right borderless printing, margins appear on the top and bottom  
of the paper.  
For top and bottom margin values, see “Printable Area” on page 81.  
Typ e s of Bord e rle ss Printing Me thod s  
You can perform borderless printing using the following two methods:  
O Auto Expand  
The printer driver enlarges the print data to a size slightly larger than the paper size and  
prints the enlarged image. The sections which are beyond the paper edges are not  
printed; therefore, resulting in borderless printing.  
Use settings such as Page Layout in the applications to set the size of the image data  
as follows.  
-
-
-
Ma tc h the p a p e r size a nd p a g e se tting fo r the p rint d a ta .  
If the a p p lic a tio n ha s m a rg in se tting s, se t the m a rg ins to 0 m m .  
Ma ke the im a g e d a ta a s la rg e a s the p a p e r size .  
More Ways to Print 106  
O Retain Size  
Create the print data larger than the paper size in the applications to produce  
borderless output. The printer driver does not enlarge the image data. Use settings  
such as Page Layout in the applications to set the size of the image data as follows.  
-
Cre a te p rint d a ta la rg e r tha n its a c tua l p rint size b y 3 m m o n the le ft a nd rig ht  
(6 m m in to ta l).  
-
-
If the a p p lic a tio n ha s m a rg in se tting s, se t the m a rg ins to 0 m m .  
Ma ke the im a g e d a ta a s la rg e a s the p a p e r size .  
Select this setting if you want to avoid image enlargement by the printer driver.  
Sup p orte d Me d ia Size s for Bord e rle ss Printing  
The following media sizes are supported for borderless printing.  
The sizes supported vary with the printer model.  
Sup p orte d p a p e r wid ths  
Sure Color  
T7000  
Sure Color  
T5000  
Sure Color  
T3000  
10 inc he s  
-
-
30 c m  
Sup e r A3/ 329 m m / 13 inc he s  
16 inc he s  
US C / 17 inc he s  
B2/ 515 m m  
A1/ 595 m m  
24 inc he s  
B1/ 728 m m  
A0/ 841 m m  
36 inc he s  
-
-
B0/ 1030 m m  
-
More Ways to Print 107  
Sup p orte d p a p e r wid ths  
Sure Color  
T7000  
Sure Color  
T5000  
Sure Color  
T3000  
44 inc he s  
-
-
Depending on the media type, the print quality may decline or borderless printing cannot  
be selected. (See “Epson Special Media Table” on page 224.)  
Ab out Roll Pa p e r Cutting  
When performing borderless printing on roll paper, you can specify whether it is left and  
right borderless printing or all edges borderless printing, and how to cut the paper in the  
printer driver’s Roll Paper Option. The cutting operation for each value is shown in the  
following chart.  
Printe r d rive r  
se tting s  
Cutting op e ra tion  
Exp la na tion  
Bo rd e rle ss  
The d e fa ult p rinte r d rive r se tting is Bord e rle ss.  
Sing le Cut  
O
O
The to p a re a m a y b e c o m e slig htly une ve n  
d e p e nd ing o n the im a g e sinc e the p rint  
o p e ra tio n sto p s while c utting the to p e d g e o f  
the ro ll p a p e r.  
If the c ut p o sitio n is m isa lig ne d slig htly, sm a ll  
p a rts o f the im a g e m a y b e sho wn o n the to p  
o r b o tto m o f the a d ja c e nt p a g e s. If this  
o c c urs, p e rfo rm Ad just Cut Position. (Se e  
Enla rg e d Co p y m e nu” o n p a g e 183.)  
O
Whe n p rinting o nly o ne p a g e the o p e ra tio n  
p e rfo rm e d is the sa m e a s tha t fo r Doub le Cut.  
Whe n c o ntinuo usly p rinting m ultip le she e ts,  
the p rinte r c uts 1 m m insid e o n the to p e d g e  
o f the first p a g e a nd the b o tto m e d g e o f the  
sub se q ue nt p a g e s to a vo id sho wing m a rg ins.  
More Ways to Print 108  
Printe r d rive r  
se tting s  
Cutting op e ra tion  
Exp la na tion  
Do ub le Cut  
O
O
O
The to p a re a m a y b e c o m e slig htly une ve n  
d e p e nd ing o n the im a g e sinc e the p rint  
o p e ra tio n sto p s while c utting the to p e d g e o f  
the ro ll p a p e r.  
The p rinte d p a p e r is a p p ro xim a te ly 2 m m  
sho rte r tha n the sp e c ifie d size sinc e the  
p rinte r c uts the p a p e r insid e the im a g e to  
a vo id sho wing to p a nd b o tto m m a rg ins.  
Afte r c utting the b o tto m e d g e o f the p re vio us  
p a g e , the p rinte r fe e d s the p a p e r, a nd the n  
c uts the to p e d g e o f the fo llo wing p a g e .  
Altho ug h this p ro d uc e s 2.4 to 5 inc he s (60 to  
127 m m ) c ut-o ff p ie c e s, the c ut is m o re  
a c c ura te .  
Se tting Proc e d ure s for Printing  
Wind ows  
1. Display the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab and adjust the following settings.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
2. Select Borderless in the Size Settings area.  
More Ways to Print 109  
To fit output to the roll width, choose Fit to Roll Paper Width before selecting  
Borderless.  
3. In the Layout tab Borderless Enlargement Setting area, select either Auto Expand  
or Retain Size.  
If Auto Expand is selected, click Amount of Enlargement and choose the amount cut  
off at the edges.  
Note:  
Retain Size is not available when Fit to Roll Paper Width is selected in the Printer  
Settings tab or Reduce/Enlarge is selected in the Layout tab.  
More Ways to Print 110  
Ma x  
:
3 m m fo r le ft a nd 5 m m fo r rig ht (the im a g e shifts 1 m m to  
the rig ht)  
Sta nd a rd  
Min  
:
:
3 m m fo r le ft a nd rig ht  
1.5 m m fo r le ft a nd rig ht  
Note:  
Moving the slider toward Min decreases the image enlargement ratio. Therefore,  
some margins may appear at the edges of the paper depending on the paper and  
printing environment.  
4. When roll paper is used, Auto Cut options are available in the Advanced tab Roll  
Paper Option area.  
See “About Roll Paper Cutting” on page 108.  
5. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Ma c OS X  
1. Open the Print screen and select the paper size from the Paper Size option, and then  
select a borderless printing method.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
The selections for borderless printing methods are displayed as shown below.  
XXXX (Roll Paper - Borderless (Auto Expand))  
XXXX (Roll Paper - Borderless (Retain Size))  
XXXX (Sheet - Borderless (Auto Expand))  
XXXX (Sheet - Borderless (Retain Size))  
More Ways to Print 111  
Where XXXX is the actual paper size, such as A4.  
Note:  
If page setting options are not available in the application’s print dialog, display the  
page settings dialog.  
2. If Auto Expand is selected for paper size, select Page Layout Settings from the list  
and click Expansion.  
The following shows how much the image will be larger than the paper edges.  
Ma x  
:
:
:
3 m m fo r le ft a nd 5 m m fo r rig ht (the im a g e shifts 1 m m to the rig ht)  
3 m m fo r le ft a nd rig ht  
Sta nd a rd  
Min  
1.5 m m fo r le ft a nd rig ht  
Note:  
Moving the slider toward Min decreases the image enlargement ratio. Therefore,  
some margins may appear at the edges of the paper depending on the paper and  
printing environment.  
More Ways to Print 112  
3. When using roll paper, select Advanced from the list and choose an Auto Cut option.  
See “About Roll Paper Cutting” on page 108.  
4. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Corre c t Color a nd Print  
The printer driver automatically and internally corrects colors to match the color space. You  
can select from the following color correction modes.  
O EPSON Standard (sRGB)  
Optimizes the sRGB space and corrects the color.  
O Business Graphics  
Performs color correction to sharpen your images based on the sRGB space.  
O Line Drawing  
Optimizes color correction for line drawing by processing the border between lines and  
the background as discontinuous.  
O ICM  
Performs color management to match the colors in the image data to those in the  
printed output (Windows only).  
See “Color Management Printing” on page 135.  
More Ways to Print 113  
O Off (No Color Management)  
Color correction is not performed by the printer driver. Choose if color management is  
performed by the application.  
See “Color Management Printing” on page 135.  
If EPSON Standard (sRGB)/Business Graphics/Line Drawing is selected for Color  
Mode, a Settings button will be displayed.  
Click the Settings button to adjust Gamma, Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and color  
balance.  
Use this option when the application in use does not have a color correction function.  
Note:  
The color correction options available vary with the operating system and the type of paper used.  
Wind ows  
1. When using applications featuring a color management function, specify how to adjust  
colors from these applications.  
When using applications without a color management function, start from step 2.  
Note:  
For information on supported platforms, see the website for the application in  
question.  
Example of Adobe Photoshop CS5  
Open the Print screen.  
More Ways to Print 114  
Select Color Management and then Document. Select Printer Manages Colors as  
the Color Handling setting, and then click Print.  
2. In the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab, select Advanced Settings for Print Quality  
and choose a color correction option.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
Additional adjustments can be made by clicking Settings.  
3. Clicking the Settings button allows you to adjust Gamma, Brightness, Contrast,  
Saturation, color balance, and other settings.  
More Ways to Print 115  
See the printer driver help for more details on each item.  
Note:  
You can adjust the correction value by checking the sample image on the left side of  
the screen. Color balance can also be adjusted by selecting Color Circle or Slide  
Bar for Color Adjustment Method.  
4. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Ma c OS X  
1. When using applications featuring a color management function, specify how to adjust  
colors from these applications.  
When using applications without a color management function, start from step 2.  
Note:  
For information on supported platforms, see the website for the application in  
question.  
Example of Adobe Photoshop CS5  
Open the Print screen.  
More Ways to Print 116  
Select Color Management and then Document. Select Printer Manages Colors as  
the Color Handling setting, and then click Print.  
2. Display the Print screen.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
3. Select Color Matching from the list, and then click EPSON Color Controls.  
4. Choose Printer Settings from the list and select Advanced Settings for Mode.  
5. Choose a color correction option from the Color Mode list.  
More Ways to Print 117  
Additional adjustments can be made by clicking Settings.  
Note:  
When using the following applications with Mac OS X 10.5, clear the Use Generic  
RGB checkbox.  
O Adobe Photoshop CS3 or later  
O Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 or later  
O Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or later  
Select the check box when using a different application from those listed above.  
6. Make the necessary settings.  
See the printer driver help for more details on each item.  
7. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
More Ways to Print 118  
Multi-Pa g e / Poste r Printing  
You can print multiple pages on a single sheet or a single page across multiple sheets.  
The following three multi-page/poster printing methods are available.  
O Folded Double-side (Windows only)  
Two consecutive pages are printed on a single sheet. The second page is flipped 180°  
and printed adjacent to the first page, allowing the paper to be folded to make a  
double-sided document.  
O N-up  
Two or four consecutive pages can be printed on a single sheet.  
O Poster (Windows only)  
More Ways to Print 119  
A single page can be printed across multiple sheets. The sheets can then be joined  
together to large posters (up to 16 times the original size). If Borderless Poster Print  
is selected, the sheets can be joined without trimming the edges, but because the  
portions outside the edges of the paper will be lost, the joins may be imperfect.  
Fold e d Doub le -Sid e (Wind ows only)  
1. In the printer driver’s Layout tab, select Page Layout. Next, select Folded  
Double-Side and click the Settings button.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
2. In the Folded Double-Side Setting dialog, select the Binding Edge and Binding  
Margin.  
More Ways to Print 120  
3. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
N-up  
Note:  
O In Windows, you cannot use the N-up printing function when performing borderless printing.  
O In Windows, you can use the Reduce/Enlarge function (Fit to Page) to print the data on  
different sizes of paper.  
See “Printing at Non-Standard Sizes” on page 100.  
Wind ows  
1. In the printer driver’s Layout tab, select Page Layout. Next, select N-up and click the  
Settings button.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
2. In the Print Layout dialog, select the Number of pages per sheet and Page Order.  
More Ways to Print 121  
If the Print page frames check box is selected, page frames are printed on each page.  
3. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Ma c OS X  
1. When the Print screen is displayed, select Layout from the list, and then specify the  
number of pages per sheet and so on.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
Note:  
You can print frames around arranged pages using the Border function.  
2. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Poste r (Wind ows only)  
1. In the printer driver’s Layout tab, select Page Layout. Next, select Poster and click the  
Settings button.  
More Ways to Print 122  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
2. In the Poster Settings dialog, select the Number of panels.  
3. Enable or disable borderless printing.  
When borderless is selected:  
Select Borderless Poster Print.  
More Ways to Print 123  
Note:  
O If Borderless Poster Print is grayed out, the selected paper or the size does not  
support borderless printing.  
See “Supported Media Sizes for Borderless Printing” on page 107 or “Epson Special  
Media Table” on page 224.  
O If Single Cut or Double Cut is selected for Auto Cut, the paper will be cut 1 or  
2 mm inside the image, resulting in imperfect joins.  
When with margins is selected:  
Clear Borderless Poster Print.  
Note:  
Regarding the size after joining together:  
If Borderless Poster Print is not selected, a Print Cutting Guides option will be  
displayed.  
The finished size is the same whether or not Trim Lines is selected. However, if  
Overlapping Alignment Marks is selected, the finished size is smaller with an  
overlap.  
4. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
More Ways to Print 124  
Joining Poste r She e ts with Printe d Bord e rs  
If Overlapping Alignment Marks is selected, join guides (indicated by the lines drawn  
through and around the X marks in the illustration below) will be printed on each sheet.  
Note:  
If the output is in color, the join guides will be in blue and the cut guides in red; otherwise, all the  
guides will be printed in black.  
The following describes how to join four printed pages together.  
More Ways to Print 125  
1. Ready the two top sheets and trim the excess from the left sheet by cutting along the  
line joining the two join guides (the centers of the X marks).  
2. Lay the upper left sheet on top of upper right sheet. Line up the X marks as shown in  
the illustration below, and temporarily fasten them using an adhesive tape on the back.  
More Ways to Print 126  
3. With the two sheets overlapping, trim the excess by cutting along the line joining the two  
cut guides (the lines to the left of the X marks).  
4. Rejoin the two sheets.  
Use an adhesive tape to stick the backs of the sheets together.  
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for the lower sheets.  
More Ways to Print 127  
6. Trim the bottom from the upper sheets by cutting along the line joining the join guides  
(the centers of the X marks).  
7. Lay the upper sheet on top of the lower sheet. Line up the X marks as shown in the  
illustration below, and temporarily fasten them using an adhesive tape on the back.  
More Ways to Print 128  
8. With the two sheets overlapping, trim the excess by cutting along the line joining the two  
cut guides (the lines above the X marks).  
9. Join the upper and lower sheets together.  
More Ways to Print 129  
Use an adhesive tape to stick the backs of the sheets together.  
10.After joining all the sheets, trim off the borders by cutting along the cut guides (outside  
the X marks).  
More Ways to Print 130  
Printing Multip le Doc um e nts (the La yout Ma na g e r)  
(Wind ows Only)  
Documents created in different applications can be printed together in your choice of  
layout. The Layout Manager can be used to improve efficiency and conserve paper.  
Sample Multi-Document Layout  
Sample Free Vertical/Horizontal Layout  
More Ways to Print 131  
Se tting Proc e d ure s for Printing  
1. Open the file you want to print in your application.  
2. In the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab, select Layout Manager and in the Size  
Settings area select the Paper Size chosen for the document in the source application.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
Note:  
The Paper Size is the size of the document in the Layout Manager. The actual  
printing paper size is set in the screen in step 6.  
3. Click OK. When printing with an application, the Layout Manager screen opens.  
The print data is not printed, but one page is placed on the paper of the Layout Manager  
screen as one object.  
4. Leaving the Layout Manager screen open, repeat steps 1 to 3 until all the documents  
have been added to the layout.  
The objects are added to the Layout Manager screen.  
5. Arrange the objects on the Layout Manager screen.  
Objects can be dragged to new positions and resized; in addition, they can be  
rearranged or rotated using the options in the Object menu.  
The overall size and placement of the objects can be changed using the Preferences  
and Arrangement options in the File menu.  
More Ways to Print 132  
See the Layout Manager screen help for more details on each function.  
6. Click Properties in the File menu and adjust printer settings in the printer driver dialog.  
Check the Media Settings and choose a Print Quality.  
7. Click the File menu on the Layout Manager screen, and then click Print.  
Printing starts.  
More Ways to Print 133  
Sa ving a nd Re c a lling Se tting s  
You can save the Layout Manager screen arrangement and setting contents to a file. If you  
need to close your application in the middle of a job, you can save it to a file and then open  
it later to continue your work.  
Sa ving  
1. On the Layout Manager screen, click File menu and then Save As.  
2. Enter the file name, select the location, and then click Save.  
3. Close the Layout Manager screen.  
Op e ning sa ve d file s  
1. Right-click the Utility shortcut icon on the Windows Taskbar ( ), and then click Layout  
Manager on the menu displayed.  
The Layout Manager screen is displayed.  
If the Utility shortcut icon is not displayed on the Windows Taskbar, see “Overview of  
the Utility Tab” on page 155.  
2. On the Layout Manager screen, click File menu and then Open.  
3. Select the location and open the required file.  
More Ways to Print 134  
Cha p te r 5  
Color Ma na g e m e nt Printing  
Ab out Color Ma na g e m e nt  
Even when using the same image data, the original image and the displayed image may  
look different, and the printed results may look different from the image you see on the  
display. This occurs due to the difference in characteristics when input devices such as  
scanners and digital cameras capture colors as electronic data, and when output devices  
such as display screens and printers reproduce colors from the color data. The color  
management system is a means to adjust differences in color conversion characteristics  
among input and output devices. As well as applications for image processing, each  
operating system is equipped with a color management system, such as ICM for Windows  
and ColorSync for Mac OS X.  
In a color management system, a color definition file called a "Profile" is used to perform  
color matching between devices. (This file is also called an ICC profile.) The profile of an  
input device is called an input profile (or source profile), and of an output device, such as a  
printer, is called a printer profile (or output profile). A profile is prepared for each media type  
in this printer’s driver.  
The color conversion areas by the input device and the color reproduction area by the  
output device differ. As a result, there are color areas that do not match even when  
performing color matching using a profile. In addition to specifying profiles, the color  
management system also specifies conversion conditions for areas where color matching  
failed as "intent". The name and type of intent vary depending on the color management  
system you are using.  
You cannot match the colors on the printed results and display by color management  
between the input device and the printer. To match both colors, you need to perform color  
management between the input device and the display as well.  
Color Management Printing 135  
Color Ma na g e m e nt Print Se tting s  
You can perform color management printing using this printer’s printer driver in the  
following two ways.  
Choose the best method according to the application you are using, the operating system  
environment, the aim of the printout and so on.  
Se tting c olor m a na g e m e nt with the a p p lic a tions  
This method is for printing from applications that support color management. All color  
management processes are carried out by the application’s color management system.  
This method is useful when you want to obtain the same color management print results  
using a common application among different operating system environments. See “Setting  
Color Management with the Applications” on page 138.  
Se tting c olor m a na g e m e nt with the p rinte r d rive r  
The printer driver uses the operating system’s color management system and carries out  
all color management processes. You can make color management settings in the printer  
driver using the following two methods.  
O Host ICM (Windows)/ColorSync (Mac OS X)  
Set when printing from applications that support color management. This is effective in  
producing similar print results from different applications under the same operating  
systems. For Windows, see “Color management printing by Host ICM (Windows)” on  
page 140. For Mac OS X, see “Color management printing by ColorSync (Mac OS X)”  
on page 142.  
O Driver ICM (Windows only)  
This allows you to perform color management printing from applications that do not  
support color management. See “Color management printing by Driver ICM (Windows  
only)” on page 143.  
Color Management Printing 136  
Se tting p rofile s  
Settings for the input profile, printer profile, and intent (matching method) vary between  
three types of color management printing since their color management engines are used  
differently. This is because color management usage differs between the engines. Make  
settings in the printer driver or application as described in the following table.  
Inp ut p rofile se tting s  
Printe r Drive r  
Printe r p rofile  
se tting s  
Inte nt se tting s  
Printe r Drive r  
Printe r Drive r  
Drive r IC M  
(Wind o ws)  
Printe r Drive r  
Ho st ICM  
Ap p lic a tio n  
Printe r Drive r  
(Wind o ws)  
C o lo rSync (Ma c O S X)  
Ap p lic a tio ns  
Ap p lic a tio n  
Ap p lic a tio n  
Printe r Drive r  
Ap p lic a tio n  
Ap p lic a tio n  
Ap p lic a tio n  
Printer profiles for each paper type that is needed when performing color management are  
installed with the printer’s printer driver. You can select the profile from the printer driver’s  
settings screen.  
See the following for detailed information.  
“Color management printing by Driver ICM (Windows only)” on page 143.  
“Color management printing by Host ICM (Windows)” on page 140.  
“Color management printing by ColorSync (Mac OS X)” on page 142.  
“Setting Color Management with the Applications” on page 138.  
Color Management Printing 137  
Se tting Color Ma na g e m e nt with the Ap p lic a tions  
Print using applications with a color management function. Make the color management  
settings in the application and disable the printer driver’s color adjustment function.  
1. Make color management settings in the applications.  
Example of Adobe Photoshop CS5  
Open the Print screen.  
Select Color Management and then Document. Select Photoshop Manages Colors  
as the Color Handling setting, select the Printer Profile and the Rendering Intent,  
and then click Print.  
2. Display the printer driver’s settings screen (Windows) or Print screen (Mac OS X).  
Make printer driver settings.  
For Windows  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
For Mac OS X  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
Color Management Printing 138  
3. Set color management to off.  
For Windows  
In the Printer Settings tab, select Advanced Settings in the Print Quality area and  
choose Off (No Color Management) for Color Mode.  
Note:  
When using Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later and  
.NET 3.0), Off (No Color Management) is automatically selected.  
For Mac OS X  
Choose Printer Settings from the list and select Advanced Settings for Mode. Select  
Off (No Color Management) for Color Mode.  
4. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Color Management Printing 139  
Se tting Color Ma na g e m e nt with the Printe r Drive r  
Color m a na g e m e nt p rinting b y Host ICM (Wind ows)  
Use image data in which an input profile has been embedded. Also, the application must  
support ICM.  
1. Make the settings for color adjustment using the application.  
Depending on the type of the application, make the settings following the table below.  
Adobe Photoshop CS3 or later  
Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or later  
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 or later  
OS  
Color Ma na g e m e nt Se tting s  
Wind o ws 7  
Printe r Ma na g e s Co lo rs  
Wind o ws Vista  
Wind o ws XP  
(Se rvic e Pa c k 2 o r la te r a nd  
.NET 3.0 o r la te r)  
Wind o ws XP  
No C o lo r Ma na g e m e nt  
(o the r tha n the a b o ve )  
In other applications, set No Color Management.  
Note:  
For information on supported platforms, see the website for the application in  
question.  
Example of Adobe Photoshop CS5  
Open the Print screen.  
Color Management Printing 140  
Select Color Management and then Document. Select Printer Manages Colors as  
the Color Handling setting, and then click Print.  
When using applications without a color management function, start from step 2.  
2. In the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab, select Advanced Settings for Print Quality,  
then select ICM for Color Mode and click Settings.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
3. Select Host ICM.  
When Epson special media is selected for Media Type in the Printer Settings tab, the  
printer profile corresponding to the media type is automatically selected and displayed  
in the Printer Profile Description box.  
Color Management Printing 141  
To change the profile, select Show all profiles at the bottom.  
4. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Color m a na g e m e nt p rinting b y ColorSync (Ma c OS X)  
Use image data in which an input profile has been embedded. Also, the application must  
support ColorSync.  
Note:  
Depending on the application, color management printing by ColorSync may not be supported.  
1. Disable the color management functions in the application.  
2. Display the Print screen.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
3. Select Color Matching from the list, and then click ColorSync.  
Color Management Printing 142  
4. Choose Printer Settings from the list and select Advanced Settings for Mode. Select  
Off (No Color Management) for Color Mode.  
5. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Color m a na g e m e nt p rinting b y Drive r ICM (Wind ows only)  
The printer driver uses its own printer profiles to perform color management. You can use  
the following two color correction methods.  
O Driver ICM (Basic)  
Specify one type of profile and intent for processing the entire image data.  
O Driver ICM (Advanced)  
The printer driver distinguishes the image data into the Image, Graphics, and Text  
areas. Specify three types of profiles and intents for processing each area.  
When using applications featuring a color management function  
Make the settings for color processing using the application before making printer driver  
settings.  
Depending on the type of the application, make the settings following the table below.  
Adobe Photoshop CS3 or later  
Adobe Photoshop Elements 6 or later  
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 or later  
Color Management Printing 143  
OS  
Color Ma na g e m e nt Se tting s  
Wind o ws 7  
Printe r Ma na g e s C o lo rs  
Wind o ws Vista  
Wind o ws XP  
(Se rvic e Pa c k 2 o r la te r a nd .NET  
3.0 o r la te r)  
Wind o ws XP (o the r tha n the  
a b o ve )  
No Co lo r Ma na g e m e nt  
In other applications, set No Color Management.  
Note:  
For information on supported platforms, see the website for the application in question.  
Example of Adobe Photoshop CS5  
Open the Print screen.  
Select Color Management and then Document. Select Printer Manages Colors as the  
Color Handling setting, and then click Print.  
1. In the printer driver’s Printer Settings tab, select Advanced Settings for Print Quality,  
then select ICM for Color Mode and click Settings.  
Color Management Printing 144  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
2. From ICM Mode in the ICM screen, select Driver ICM (Basic) or Driver ICM  
(Advanced). If you select Driver ICM (Advanced), you can specify the profiles and  
intent for each image such as photos, graphics, and text data.  
Inte nt  
Exp la na tion  
Sa tura tio n  
Pe rc e p tua l  
Ke e p s the c urre nt sa tura tio n unc ha ng e d a nd c o nve rts the d a ta .  
Co nve rts the d a ta so tha t a m o re visua lly na tura l im a g e is p ro d uc e d .  
This fe a ture is use d whe n a wid e r g a m ut o f c o lo r is use d fo r im a g e d a ta .  
Re la tive  
C o lo rim e tric  
Co nve rts the d a ta so tha t a se t o f c o lo r g a m ut a nd white p o int (o r c o lo r  
te m p e ra ture ) c o o rd ina te s in the o rig ina l d a ta m a tc h the ir  
c o rre sp o nd ing p rint c o o rd ina te s. This fe a ture is use d fo r m a ny typ e s o f  
c o lo r m a tc hing .  
Ab so lute  
C o lo rim e tric  
Assig ns a b so lute c o lo r g a m ut c o o rd ina te s to the o rig ina l a nd p rint d a ta  
a nd c o nve rts the d a ta . The re fo re , c o lo r to ne a d justm e nt is no t  
p e rfo rm e d o n a ny white p o int (o r c o lo r te m p e ra ture ) fo r the o rig ina l o r  
p rint d a ta . This fe a ture is use d fo r sp e c ia l p urp o se s suc h a s lo g o c o lo r  
p rinting .  
3. Check other settings, and then start printing.  
Color Management Printing 145  
Cha p te r 6  
Tip s for Using the Printe r Drive r (Wind ows)  
Disp la ying the Se tting s Sc re e n  
You can access the printer driver in the following ways:  
O From Windows applications  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Windows)” on page 71.  
O From the Printer icon  
From the Printe r ic on  
Follow the steps below when specifying common settings among applications or  
performing printer maintenance, such as Nozzle Check or Head Cleaning.  
1. Open the Printer or Printers and Faxes folder.  
For Windows 7:  
Click  
and then Devices and Printers.  
For Windows Vista:  
Click , Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, and then Printer.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 146  
For Windows XP:  
Click Start, Control Panel, Printers and Other Hardware, and then Printers and  
Faxes.  
Note:  
If your Windows XP Control Panel is in Classic View, click Start, Control Panel,  
and then Printers and Faxes.  
2. Right-click your printer icon, and click Printing preferences.  
The printer driver dialog will be displayed.  
Make the necessary settings. These settings become the default settings of the printer  
driver.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 147  
Disp la ying He lp  
You can access the printer driver help in the following ways:  
O Click Help  
O Right-click on the item you want to check and display  
Clic k the He lp Button to Disp la y  
By displaying help, you can use the contents page or keyword search to read the help.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 148  
Rig ht-c lic k on the ite m you wa nt to c he c k a nd d isp la y  
Right-click the item, and then click Help.  
Note:  
In Windows XP, click  
on the title bar, and then click the help item you want to view.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 149  
Custom izing the Printe r Drive r  
You can save the settings or change the display items as you prefer.  
Sa ving va rious se tting s a s your Se le c t Se tting s  
All printer driver settings can be saved to Select Setting. In addition, Select Setting  
contains pre-defined settings recommended for a variety of common situations.  
Recall Select Setting to increase efficiency if you often print at the same settings.  
1. In the Printer Settings, Layout, and Advanced tabs, select the settings you wish to save  
to Select Setting.  
2. Click Save/Del.  
3. Enter any name in the Name box, and then click Save.  
You can save up to 100 settings. You can choose a setting you have registered from the  
Select Setting list box.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 150  
Note:  
You can save the settings as a file by clicking Export. You can share the settings by clicking  
Import to import the saved file on another computer.  
Ad d ing Me d ia Typ e s  
Select Print Quality and Media Settings for the type of media you wish to add and save  
it as a custom media type. The custom media type will be added to the Media Type menu  
in the Media Settings area.  
1. In the Printer Settings tab, select Advanced Settings and adjust settings as desired.  
Note:  
You cannot add a custom media type if Select Target is selected in the Print  
Quality area.  
2. Click Advanced Media Control in the Advanced tab.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 151  
3. Adjust settings for the new custom media and click OK.  
4. Click Custom Settings in the Advanced tab.  
5. Enter any name in the Name box, and then click Save.  
You can save up to 100 settings. You can choose a setting you have registered from the  
Media Type list box.  
Note:  
You can save the settings as a file by clicking Export. You can share the settings by clicking  
Import to import the saved file on another computer.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 152  
Re a rra ng ing d isp la y ite m s  
To display frequently used items right away, you can arrange Select Setting, Media Type,  
and Paper Size as follows.  
O Hide unnecessary items.  
O Rearrange in an order of most frequent use.  
O Arrange in groups (folders).  
1. Go to the Utility tab and click Menu Arrangement.  
2. Select Edit Item.  
3. Order or group items in the List box.  
O You can move and order items by dragging and dropping.  
O To add a new group (folder), click Add Group.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 153  
O To delete a group (folder), click Delete Group.  
O Drag and drop unnecessary items to Not Display.  
Note:  
When Delete Group is performed, the group (folder) is deleted, however the items  
in the deleted group (folder) remain.  
4. Click Save.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 154  
Ove rvie w of the Utility Ta b  
The printer driver’s Utility tab provides access to the following.  
O Nozzle Check  
This function prints a nozzle check pattern to check if the print head nozzles are  
clogged. If you see banding or gaps in the printouts, perform head cleaning to clear any  
clogged nozzles.  
See “Cleaning the print head” on page 187.  
O Head Cleaning  
If you see banding or gaps in the printouts, perform head cleaning. Cleans the surface  
of the print head to improve the print quality.  
See “Cleaning the print head” on page 187.  
O Print Head Alignment  
If the print results appear grainy or out of focus, perform Print Head Alignment. The  
Print Head Alignment function corrects print head gaps.  
See “Minimizing Print Misalignments (Head Alignment)” on page 189.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 155  
O EPSON Status Monitor 3  
You can check the printer’s status, such as the remaining ink level and error messages,  
from the computer’s screen.  
O Monitoring Preferences  
You can select the error notifications displayed on the EPSON Status Monitor 3 screen,  
or register a shortcut for the Utility icon to the Taskbar.  
Note:  
If you select the Shortcut Icon on the Monitoring Preferences screen, the Utility shortcut icon is  
displayed on the Windows Taskbar.  
By right-clicking the icon, you can display the following menu and perform maintenance  
functions.  
EPSON Status Monitor 3 starts when the printer name is clicked from the displayed menu.  
O Print Queue  
You can display the list of all waiting jobs.  
On the Print Queue screen, you can view information on the data waiting to be printed,  
delete and reprint these jobs.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 156  
O Speed and Progress  
You can set various functions for printer driver basic operations.  
O Menu Arrangement  
You can arrange display items, Select Setting, Media Type, and Paper Size, for  
example, you can reorder them by the frequency of your access. See “Rearranging  
display items” on page 153.  
O Export or Import  
You can export or import the printer driver settings. This function is useful when you  
want to make the same printer driver settings on multiple computers.  
O EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2  
You can update the printer’s firmware and make custom paper settings. See the  
EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2 help for details.  
Note:  
If EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2 and Printer Firmware Update are grayed out, EPSON LFP  
Remote Panel 2 is not installed. Install EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2 from the software disc  
Software List.  
O Printer Firmware Update  
You can update the printer’s firmware to the latest version. See the EPSON LFP  
Remote Panel 2 help for details.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 157  
Uninsta lling the Printe r Drive r  
Follow the steps below to remove the printer driver and EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2.  
Important:  
O You must log in with an Administrators group.  
O In Windows 7/Windows Vista, if an Administrator password or confirmation is requested,  
enter the password and then continue with the operation.  
1. Turn off the printer, and unplug the interface cable.  
2. Go to the Control Panel and click Uninstall a program from the Programs category.  
3. Select the software you want to remove and then click Uninstall/Change (or  
Change/Remove/Add or remove).  
You can remove EPSON Status Monitor 3 and the printer driver by selecting EPSON  
SC-XXXXX Printer Uninstall.  
Select EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2 to remove EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 158  
4. Select the target printer icon, and then click OK.  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue. When the delete confirmation message  
appears, click Yes.  
Restart the computer if you are reinstalling the printer driver.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Windows) 159  
Cha p te r 7  
Tip s for Using the Printe r Drive r (Ma c OS X)  
Disp la ying the Se tting s Sc re e n  
The display method of the printer driver setting screen may differ depending on the  
application or the OS version.  
See “Basic Printing Methods (Mac OS X)” on page 76.  
Disp la ying He lp  
Click  
in the printer driver setting screen to display Help.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) 160  
Using Ep son Printe r Utility 4  
You can perform maintenance tasks such as Nozzle Check or Head Cleaning by using  
Epson Printer Utility 4. This utility is installed automatically when you install the printer  
driver.  
Sta rting Ep son Printe r Utility 4  
Mac OS X 10.6.x, 10.7.x, 10.8.x:  
1. Select System Preferences > Print & Scan (or Print & Fax) from the Apple menu.  
2. Select the printer and click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.  
Mac OS X 10.5.8:  
1. Select System Preferences > Print & Fax from the Apple menu.  
2. Select the printer and click Open Print Queue > Utility.  
Ep son Printe r Utility 4 Func tions  
You can perform the following maintenance functions from Epson Printer Utility 4.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) 161  
O EPSON Status Monitor  
You can check the printer’s status, such as the remaining ink level and error messages,  
from the computer’s screen.  
O Nozzle Check  
This function prints a nozzle check pattern to check if the print head nozzles are  
clogged. If you see banding or gaps in the printouts, perform head cleaning to clear any  
clogged nozzles.  
See “Cleaning the print head” on page 187.  
O Head Cleaning  
If you see banding or gaps in the printouts, perform head cleaning. Cleans the surface  
of the print head to improve the print quality.  
See “Cleaning the print head” on page 187.  
O Print Head Alignment  
If the print results appear grainy or out of focus, perform Print Head Alignment. The  
Print Head Alignment function corrects print head gaps.  
See “Minimizing Print Misalignments (Head Alignment)” on page 189.  
O EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2  
You can update the printer’s firmware and make custom paper settings. See the EPSON  
LFP Remote Panel 2 help for details.  
O Printer Firmware Update  
You can update the printer’s firmware to the latest version. See the EPSON LFP Remote  
Panel 2 help for details.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) 162  
Uninsta lling the Printe r Drive r  
Before reinstalling or upgrading the printer driver or EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2, uninstall  
the affected software.  
Use the Uninstaller to uninstall the printer driver.  
Downloading the Uninstaller  
Download the Uninstaller from the Epson website.  
http://www.epson.com/  
Using the Uninstaller  
Follow the instructions on the Epson website.  
Re m oving EPSON LFP Re m ote Pa ne l 2  
Drag and drop the EPSON Remote Panel 2 folder from the Applications folder into the  
Trash.  
Tips for Using the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) 163  
Cha p te r 8  
Using the Control Pa ne l Me nu  
Me nu Op e ra tions  
The steps for displaying the various menus are shown below. The example below shows  
the steps for accessing the Paper menu.  
*1 Available when optional hard disk unit is installed.  
*2 Standard menu (displayed if optional hard disk unit is not installed).  
*3 After pressing the OK button to select the highlighted option, press the y button to return to the previous  
menu. Press the W button to exit.  
Disp la ye d o nly whe n a sc a nne r is c o nne c te d  
Sta rt c o p ying  
Using the Control Panel Menu 164  
Me nu List  
The items and options available in the menu are described below. See the reference pages  
for more details on each item.  
, Print Queues menu  
See “Print Queues menu” on page 170.  
Me nu ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Print Q ue ue  
XXXXXXXXXXX (na m e o f q ue ue d  
p rint jo b )  
Lists the Wa iting Jo b Na m e , Use r, Estim a te d Sta rt  
Tim e , Estim a te d Print Tim e , a nd Printing  
Ava ila b ility.  
Ho ld Que ue  
Vie w Ho ld  
Q ue ue  
XXXXXXXXXXX  
(na m e o f he ld  
p rint jo b )  
Lists the Pa use d Jo b Na m e , Use r, Pa p e r Typ e ,  
So urc e , Size , a nd Re a so n Fo r Ho ld .  
Re sum e All Jo b s  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting .  
Sa ve d Jo b  
Q ue ue  
XXXXXXXXXXX (na m e o f sto re d  
p rint jo b )  
Lists the Sto re d Jo b Na m e , Use r, Le ng th, Pa g e s,  
Pa p e r Typ e , C o p ie s, So urc e , Size , a nd Estim a te d  
Print Tim e .  
Pre ss OK to re sum e p rinting .  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting .  
Print Jo b Lo g She e t  
. Paper menu  
See “Paper menu” on page 171.  
Me nu ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Lo a d / Re m o ve  
Pa p e r  
Re m o ve Pa p e r  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Disp la ys instruc tio ns fo r re m o ving the p a p e r.  
Disp la ys instruc tio ns fo r lo a d ing the p a p e r.  
C ut She e t (up to 0.8 m m thic k)  
Po ste r Bo a rd  
Se le c t Pa p e r  
Typ e  
Pho to Pa p e r  
Lists sup p o rte d Ep so n m e d ia .  
Ma tte Pa p e r  
Pla in Pa p e r  
Othe rs  
C usto m Pa p e r  
Lists the na m e s o f use r-d e fine d c usto m p a p e r  
typ e s.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 165  
Me nu ite m  
De sc rip tion  
C usto m Pa p e r  
Se tting  
XXXXXXXXXX Se le c t  
XXXXXXXXXX Re fe re nc e  
Pho to Pa p e r  
Ma tte Pa p e r  
Pla in Pa p e r  
Othe rs  
Lists sup p o rte d Ep so n  
m e d ia .  
(na m e o f  
c usto m  
Pa p e r  
p a p e r typ e )  
No Pa p e r Se le c te d  
No Pa p e r Se le c te d  
Pla te n G a p  
Na rro w, Sta nd a rd , Wid e , Wid e r  
De te c t Pa p e r  
Thic kne ss  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting .  
Pa p e r Fe e d  
Ad just  
Pa tte rn  
Pre ss OK to sta rt  
p rinting .  
Va lue  
–0.70 to +0.70%  
Pa p e r Suc tio n  
–4 to 0  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Te nsio n  
No rm a l, Hig h, Extra Hig h  
Re m o ve Ske w  
Se tting Na m e  
On, Off  
22 c ha ra c te rs o r le ss (le tte rs, num b e rs, a nd  
sym b o ls)  
Re sto re Se tting s  
Ye s, No  
Print Pa p e r List  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting .  
- Maintenance menu  
See “Maintenance menu” on page 174.  
Me nu ite m  
De sc rip tion  
No zzle Che c k  
He a d Cle a ning  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting .  
Using the Control Panel Menu 166  
Me nu ite m  
De sc rip tion  
He a d  
Auto (Uni-D)  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting / a lig nm e nt.  
Alig nm e nt  
Auto (Bi-D)  
Ma nua l (Uni-D)  
Ma nua l (Bi-D)  
Ad just Cut Po sitio n  
Re p la c e Cutte r  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting .  
C utte r  
Ma inte na nc e  
–3 to 3 m m  
Pre ss OK to sta rt m o ve .  
/ Setup menu  
See “Setup menu” on page 175.  
Me nu ite m  
Printe r Se tup  
De sc rip tion  
On, Off  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Se tup  
Auto Cut  
Re fre sh Ma rg in  
Pa g e Line  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Ma rg in  
No rm a l, To p 15 m m / Bo tto m 15 m m , To p  
35 m m / Bo tto m 15 m m , To p 45 m m / Bo tto m  
15 m m , 3 m m , 15 m m  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Re m a ining  
On, Off  
Re m a ining Ale rt  
1 to 15 m (4 to 50 ft)  
Ad va nc e d  
Se tting s  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Te nsio n  
Lo w, No rm a l, Hig h, Extra Hig h  
Le ss He a d  
Sc uffing  
On, Off  
Drying Tim e Pe r  
Pa g e  
0 to 60 m inute s  
On, Off  
Pa p e r Size  
Che c k  
Me d ia Ske w  
Che c k  
On, Off  
Sto re He ld Jo b  
On, Off  
Re sto re Se tting s  
Firm wa re Ve rsio n  
Op tio n Sta tus  
Ye s, No  
Printe r Sta tus  
xxxxxxx,x.xx,xxxx  
Disp la ys the o p tio ns c o nne c te d .  
2
2
Sho w To ta l Prints  
Print Sta tus She e t  
XXXXXXX m (XXXXXX ft )  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting .  
Using the Control Panel Menu 167  
Me nu ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Auto  
Ne two rk  
Se tup  
IP Ad d re ss Se tting  
-
Pa ne l  
IP Ad d re ss, Sub ne t Ma sk, De fa ult  
G a te wa y  
Print Sta tus She e t  
Re sto re Se tting s  
Sle e p Mo d e  
Pre ss OK to sta rt p rinting .  
Ye s, No  
Po we r  
Se tting s  
5 to 180 m inute s  
O ff, 1 to 24 ho urs  
Ye s, No  
Po we r Off Tim e r  
Re sto re Se tting s  
La ng ua g e  
Pre fe re nc e  
Lists the sup p o rte d la ng ua g e s.  
m , ft/ in  
Unit: Le ng th  
Ale rt La m p Se tting  
C ha ng e Pa sswo rd  
On, Off  
Ad m inistra to r  
Me nu  
Ente r a p a sswo rd .  
Pa sswo rd Re q uire d , No Pa sswo rd Re q uire d  
O p e ra tio na l  
C o ntro l  
Ne two rk Se tup  
Po we r C le a ning  
Ma na g e  
HDD  
Fo rm a t Ha rd Disk  
Ye s, No  
Da te And Tim e  
Tim e Zo ne  
MM/ DD/ YY HH:MM  
Ente r the tim e d iffe re nc e b e twe e n G MT a nd  
the c urre nt tim e zo ne .  
Re se t All Se tting s  
Ye s, No  
Using the Control Panel Menu 168  
+ Enlarged Copy menu  
This menu is displayed only when a scanner is connected.  
See “Enlarged Copy menu” on page 183.  
Me nu ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Co lo r/ B&W  
Auto  
Co lo r, B&W  
A3->Auto , B4->Auto , A4->Auto ,  
B5->Auto , A5->Auto , LTR->Auto ,  
4x6->Auto , A4/ 2->Ba nne r(Auto )  
With Bo rd e r, Bo rd e rle ss  
Othe r Size  
Do c um e nt Size  
Outp ut Size  
Bo rd e r  
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, LTR, 4x6  
A0, US E, B1, A1, US D, B2, US C, A2, A0 (2 She e ts)  
With Bo rd e r, Bo rd e rle ss  
Q ua lity  
De nsity  
Dra ft, Fine  
Five o p tio ns fro m Lig ht to Da rk  
Using the Control Panel Menu 169  
Me nu De sc rip tions  
Print Que ue s m e nu  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
*
Print Q ue ue  
XXXXXXXXXXX (na m e  
o f q ue ue d p rint jo b )  
Wa iting Jo b  
Na m e  
Lists the e stim a te d sta rt tim e a nd tim e  
ne e d e d to p rint the se le c te d jo b .  
Use r  
It a lso p re d ic ts whe the r the jo b c a n b e  
c o m p le te d witho ut re p la c ing p a p e r, ink o r  
the Ma inte na nc e Bo x. Printing c a n  
p ro c e e d e ve n if “Ca n No t Co m p le te ” is  
d isp la ye d . Ho we ve r, the p rinte r m a y run  
o ut o f ink o r p a p e r d uring p rinting .  
Estim a te d  
Sta rt Tim e  
Estim a te d  
Print Tim e  
Printing  
Ava ila b ility  
Re m o te Ma na g e r a nd the LFP HDD Utility  
d isp la y the re a so n fo r the “C a n No t  
Co m p le te ” m e ssa g e a nd a llo w yo u to ho ld  
o r c a nc e l the jo b .  
Se e The Purp o se o f the Ha rd Disk Unit” o n  
p a g e 87.  
The p rinte r will o nly p re d ic t a va ila b ility o n  
the b a sis o f the a m o unt o f p a p e r re m a ining  
if On is se le c te d fo r Roll Pa p e r Re m a ining .  
The p rinte r will no t p re d ic t a va ila b ility o n  
the b a sis o f the a m o unt o f ink re m a ining  
whe n d o c um e nts a re p rinte d using LFP Print  
Plug -In fo r O ffic e o r EPSO N C o p yFa c to ry5.  
*
Ho ld Q ue ue  
Vie w  
Ho ld  
XXXXXXX  
XXXX  
Pa use d Jo b  
Na m e  
This o p tio n is a va ila b le o nly if On is se le c te d  
fo r Store He ld Job in the Se tup m e nu,  
Q ue ue  
(na m e o f  
he ld  
p rint jo b )  
Use r  
Disp la ys the p rint se tting s fo r he ld jo b s a nd  
the re a so n the jo b is he ld .  
Pa p e r Typ e  
So urc e  
Size  
Jo b s tha t a re he ld b e c a use the jo b p rint  
se tting s d iffe r fro m tho se c urre ntly se le c te d  
fo r the p rinte r c a n b e p rinte d a s d e sc rib e d  
b e lo w.  
Re a so n Fo r  
Ho ld  
(1) Re p la c e the p a p e r a nd ta ke wha te ve r  
o the r ste p s m a y b e ne c e ssa ry to re a d y the  
d e vic e fo r p rinting .  
(2) Se le c t Re sum e All Job s.  
Re sum e All Jo b s  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to re sum e a ll he ld jo b s c urre ntly in the  
q ue ue .  
Using the Control Panel Menu 170  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Sa ve d Jo b  
Q ue ue  
XXXXXXXXXXX (na m e  
o f sto re d p rint jo b )  
Sto re d Jo b  
Na m e  
Sho ws the sta tus o f the se le c te d sto re d jo b  
whe n it wa s la st p rinte d .  
*
Use r  
Afte r vie wing the jo b , p re ss the OK b utto n  
to e nte r the num b e r o f c o p ie s. Pre ss the  
u/ d b utto ns to c ho o se the num b e r o f  
c o p ie s a nd p re ss the OK b utto n to d isp la y  
the e stim a te d p rint tim e a nd p rint  
a va ila b ility. Pre ss the OK b utto n to sta rt  
p rinting .  
Le ng th  
Pa g e s  
Pa p e r Typ e  
Co p ie s  
So urc e  
Size  
Estim a te d  
Print Tim e  
Print Jo b Lo g She e t  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to p rint the p rint jo b lo g .  
* Displayed only when optional hard disk unit is installed.  
Pa p e r m e nu  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Lo a d / Re m o ve Pa p e r  
Re m o ve  
Pa p e r  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to vie w instruc tio ns fo r  
re m o ving the p a p e r. Fo llo w the o n-sc re e n  
instruc tio ns to re m o ve the p a p e r.  
Instruc tio ns a re no t d isp la ye d if no p a p e r is  
lo a d e d .  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Hig hlig ht the p a p e r to b e lo a d e d a nd p re ss  
the OK b utto n. Fo llo w the o n-sc re e n  
instruc tio ns to lo a d the p a p e r.  
C ut She e t  
(up to 0.8 m m  
thic k)  
If p a p e r is a lre a d y lo a d e d in the p rinte r, the  
instruc tio ns fo r re m o ving the lo a d e d p a p e r  
typ e will b e d isp la ye d b e fo re lo a d ing  
instruc tio ns a re sho wn.  
Po ste r Bo a rd  
Se le c t  
Pa p e r  
Typ e  
Pho to Pa p e r  
Se le c t the typ e o f p a p e r lo a d e d .  
Ma tte Pa p e r  
Pla in Pa p e r  
Othe rs  
C usto m Pa p e r  
Se le c t the na m e o f the c usto m p a p e r lo a d e d in the p rinte r.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 171  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Pho to Pa p e r  
Ma tte Pa p e r  
Pla in Pa p e r  
O the rs  
Custo m  
Pa p e r  
Se tting  
XXXXXXXX  
XXX  
(na m e o f  
c usto m  
p a p e r  
Se le c t  
Re fe re nc e  
Pa p e r  
Yo u c a n se le c t the m e d ia typ e tha t is the  
c lo se st to the p a p e r yo u a re using .  
typ e )  
No Pa p e r  
Se le c te d  
Se le c t this o p tio n if yo u d o no t wish to  
sp e c ify the p a p e r typ e .  
Pla te n  
G a p  
Na rro w  
Se le c t the p la te n g a p whic h is the d ista nc e  
b e twe e n the p rint he a d a nd the p a p e r.  
No rm a lly, se le c t Sta nd a rd . Se le c t a wid e r  
se tting if p rinte d im a g e s a re sm e a re d . If,  
up o n p e rfo rm ing he a d a lig nm e nt yo u fe e l  
tha t it is still no t c o m p le te ly a lig ne d , se le c t  
Na rrow.  
Sta nd a rd  
(De fa ult)  
Wid e  
Wid e r  
De te c t  
Pa p e r  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to p rint a p a tte rn to d e te rm ine the  
thic kne ss o f the c urre nt p a p e r.  
Thic kne ss  
Se le c t the p a tte rn num b e r with the le a st m isa lig nm e nt fro m  
the p rint re sults.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 172  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Pa tte rn  
Custo m  
Pa p e r  
Se tting  
XXXXXXXX  
XXX  
(na m e o f  
c usto m  
p a p e r  
Pa p e r  
Fe e d  
Ad just  
Use this se tting if yo u a re una b le to re so lve  
b a nd ing issue s (ho rizo nta l strip e d line s o r  
une ve n c o lo rs) in the sta nd a rd p rint a re a  
(fo r c ut she e ts, the a re a e xc lud ing the 1 to 2  
c m strip a t the b o tto m o f the p a p e r) e ve n  
a fte r he a d c le a ning o r he a d a lig nm e nt.  
Va lue  
(Co nt’d )  
typ e )  
(Co nt’d )  
Pa tte rn Se le c te d  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to p rint a n a d justm e nt  
p a tte rn. Me a sure the d ista nc e s b e twe e n  
the “+” sym b o ls in the p rinte d a d justm e nt  
p a tte rn.  
Use o nly the d ista nc e b e twe e n the c e nte r  
sym b o ls o r the a ve ra g e o f the d ista nc e s  
b e twe e n the le ft, c e nte r, a nd rig ht sym b o ls.  
Afte r the a d justm e nt p a tte rn is p rinting , the  
le ng th o f the p a tte rn will b e d isp la ye d in the  
c o ntro l p a ne l. Pre ss the u/ db utto ns to e nte r  
the m e a sure d va lue a nd p re ss the OK  
b utto n.  
Va lue Se le c te d  
C ho o se a n a d justm e nt b e twe e n –0.70 a nd  
+0.70%.  
Se le c ting to o sm a ll a va lue c a use s d a rk  
b a nd s; a d just the a m o unt up wa rd . Sim ila rly,  
c ho o sing to o la rg e a va lue c a use s white  
b a nd s; a d just the a m o unt d o wnwa rd .  
Pa p e r  
Suc tio n  
–4 to 0  
It is im p o rta nt to c ho o se the a p p ro p ria te  
a m o unt o f suc tio n fo r the p a p e r use d in  
o rd e r to m a inta in the c o rre c t d ista nc e  
b e twe e n the p a p e r a nd the p rint he a d .  
Cho o sing to o hig h a va lue fo r thin o r so ft  
p a p e r will inc re a se the d ista nc e b e twe e n  
the p a p e r a nd the p rint he a d , c a using p rint  
q ua lity to d e c line o r p re ve nting the p a p e r  
fe e d ing c o rre c tly. If this ha p p e ns, lo we r the  
p a p e r suc tio n. The suc tio n p o we r is  
we a ke ne d whe n the p a ra m e te r is lo we re d .  
Using the Control Panel Menu 173  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Custo m  
Pa p e r  
XXXXXXXX  
XXX  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Te nsio n  
No rm a l  
(De fa ult)  
Se le c t Hig h o r Extra Hig h if the p a p e r  
wrinkle s d uring p rinting .  
Se tting  
(Co nt’d )  
(na m e o f  
c usto m  
p a p e r  
Hig h  
Extra Hig h  
O n (De fa ult)  
O ff  
typ e )  
(Co nt’d )  
Re m o ve  
Ske w  
Se le c t whe the r to e na b le (On) o r d isa b le  
(Off) p a p e r ske w re d uc tio n.  
Se tting  
Na m e  
Ente r a na m e o f up to 22 c ha ra c te rs fo r c usto m p a p e r  
se tting s. C ho o se a n e a sy-to -re m e m b e r na m e fo r q uic k  
se le c tio n.  
Re sto re  
Se tting s  
Ye s  
No  
Re sto re the se le c te d c usto m p a p e r se tting s  
to d e fa ult va lue s.  
Print Pa p e r List  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to p rint a list o f c usto m p a p e r se tting s.  
Ma inte na nc e m e nu  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
No zzle Che c k  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to p rint a no zzle c he c k p a tte rn.  
Visua lly insp e c t the p rinte d p a tte rn a nd p e rfo rm  
he a d c le a ning if yo u no tic e fa int o r m issing a re a s.  
Se e Che c king fo r c lo g g e d no zzle s” o n p a g e 184.  
He a d Cle a ning  
Insp e c t the p rinte d p a tte rn a nd se le c t the c he c k  
b o xe s fo r p a tte rns with fa int o r m issing a re a s. To se le c t  
a ll no zzle s, p la c e a c he c k in the b o x o n the le ft.  
Se e C le a ning the p rint he a d ” o n p a g e 187.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 174  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
He a d Alig nm e nt  
Auto (Uni-D)  
Auto (Bi-D)  
If p rint re sults a re g ra iny o r o ut o f fo c us, p e rfo rm he a d  
a lig nm e nt to re a lig n the p rint he a d . If Auto is  
se le c te d , the p rinte r will sc a n the p rinte d p a tte rn  
d uring p rinting a nd re a lig n the he a d a uto m a tic a lly.  
Ma nua l (Uni-D)  
Ma nua l (Bi-D)  
If Ma nua l is se le c te d , a p a tte rn will b e p rinte d ;  
insp e c t the p a tte rn visua lly a nd e nte r the va lue yo u  
think a p p ro p ria te .  
Se e Minim izing Print Misa lig nm e nts (He a d  
Alig nm e nt)” o n p a g e 189.  
C utte r  
Ma inte na nc e  
Ad just Cut Po sitio n  
Re p la c e C utte r  
–3 to 3 m m  
Yo u c a n fine tune the c ut p o sitio n  
whe n p rinting to ro ll p a p e r with no  
m a rg ins in a ll d ire c tio ns. The c ut  
p o sitio n c a n b e a d juste d in  
inc re m e nts o f 0.2 m m .  
Mo ve s the c utte r to the re p la c e m e nt p o sitio n so it  
c a n b e re p la c e d . Pre ss the OK b utto n to m o ve the  
c utte r to the re p la c e m e nt p o sitio n. The p a p e r m ust  
b e re m o ve d b e fo re the c utte r c a n b e re p la c e d .  
Re m o ve the p a p e r b e fo re p ro c e e d ing . Se e  
Re p la c ing the C utte r” o n p a g e 197.  
Se tup m e nu  
Selecting Administrator Menu displays a password prompt. No password is entered at  
shipment; press the OK button to proceed. If the administrator password has been  
changed, enter the administrator password.  
Ite m  
Printe r Se tup  
De sc rip tion  
O n (De fa ult)  
O ff  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Se tup  
Auto Cut  
Cho o se On to a uto m a tic a lly c ut  
ro ll p a p e r using the b uilt-in c utte r  
a s e a c h p a g e is p rinte d , Off to  
d isa b le a uto p a p e r c utting . The  
se tting se le c te d with the p rinte r  
d rive r ta ke s p rio rity whe n the  
p rinte r d rive r is use d .  
Re fre sh  
Ma rg in  
O n (De fa ult)  
O ff  
If On is se le c te d d uring  
b o rd e rle ss p rinting , the p rinte r will  
a uto m a tic a lly trim the le a d ing  
e d g e to re m o ve a ny ink sta ins  
tha t m a y ha ve b e e n le ft b y the  
p re vio us c o p y; to d isa b le this  
fe a ture , c ho o se Off.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 175  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
On (De fa ult)  
O ff  
Printe r Se tup  
(Co nt’d )  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Se tup  
(Co nt’d )  
Pa g e Line  
If Auto Cut is Off, yo u c a n c ho o se  
to p rint (On) o r no t p rint (Off) c ut  
line s o n ro ll p a p e r. Cut line s a re  
no t p rinte d if Auto Cut is On o r  
whe n c ut she e ts o r p o ste r b o a rd  
is use d .  
No te , ho we ve r, tha t if the ro ll  
wid th se le c te d with the  
c o m p ute r is na rro we r tha n the  
p a p e r lo a d e d in the p rinte r, c ut  
line s will b e p rinte d re g a rd le ss o f  
the o p tio n se le c te d fo r Auto Cut.  
The se tting se le c te d with the  
p rinte r d rive r ta ke s p rio rity whe n  
the p rinte r d rive r is use d .  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Ma rg in  
No rm a l (De fa ult)  
Whe n se t to Norm a l, the to p a nd  
b o tto m m a rg ins a re 15 m m , a nd  
the le ft a nd rig ht m a rg ins a re 3  
m m .  
To p 15 m m / Bo tto m  
15 m m  
To p 35 m m / Bo tto m  
15 m m  
Exc e p t fo r 15 m m , the le ft a nd  
rig ht m a rg ins fo r a ll o the r se tting s  
a re 3 m m .  
To p 45 m m / Bo tto m  
15 m m  
Se e Printa b le Are a ” o n p a g e  
81.  
3 m m  
15 m m  
On (De fa ult)  
O ff  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Re m a ining  
Se le c t whe the r to d isp la y/ re c o rd  
(On) o r no t to d isp la y/ re c o rd  
(Off) the a m o unt o f re m a ining  
ro ll p a p e r. The fo llo wing o p tio ns  
c a n b e m a d e a va ila b le b y  
se le c ting On a nd e nte ring the  
le ng th o f the ro ll.  
Am o unt o f ro ll p a p e r re m a ining  
Whe n the ro ll is re m o ve d , a  
b a rc o d e will a uto m a tic a lly b e  
p rinte d o n the ro ll sta ting the  
le ng th re m a ining , the va lue  
se le c te d fo r the ro ll re m a ining  
a le rt, a nd the p a p e r typ e .  
The b a rc o d e is a uto m a tic a lly  
re a d a nd se tting s a d juste d the  
ne xt tim e the p a p e r is use d ,  
im p ro ving e ffic ie nc y whe n  
m ultip le ro lls o f p a p e r a re use d .  
Printing Ava ila b ility  
The p rinte r will e stim a te p rinting  
a va ila b ility b a se d o n the le ng th  
o f the ro ll.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 176  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Printe r Se tup  
(Co nt’d )  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Se tup  
Re m a ining  
Ale rt  
1 to 15 m (4 to 50 ft) Disp la ye d whe n On is se le c te d  
fo r Roll Pa p e r Re m a ining .  
(Co nt’d )  
Se t within a ra ng e fro m 1 to 15 m  
(4 to 50 ft) to d isp la y a wa rning  
whe n the a m o unt o f re m a ining  
ro ll p a p e r d ro p s b e lo w tha t lim it.  
Yo u c a n se t in 0.5 m (1 ft)  
inc re m e nts.  
Ad va nc e d  
Se tting s  
Ro ll Pa p e r  
Te nsio n  
Lo w  
Se le c t Hig h o r Extra Hig h if the  
p a p e r wrinkle s d uring p rinting .  
No rm a l (De fa ult)  
Hig h  
Roll Pa p e r Te nsion c a n b e  
sp e c ifie d se p a ra te ly fo r e a c h  
p a p e r typ e using the Custom  
Pa p e r Se tting o p tio n in the Pa p e r  
m e nu.  
Extra Hig h  
Whe n Custom Pa p e r is c ho se n  
fo r Se le c t Pa p e r Typ e , the p rinte r  
will use the va lue se le c te d fo r  
Roll Pa p e r Te nsion in the Custom  
Pa p e r Se tting .  
This se tting ta ke s e ffe c t if no  
c usto m ro ll p a p e r te nsio n is  
sp e c ifie d .  
Le ss He a d  
Sc uffing  
O n  
If the p a p e r is thic k, the p rint  
he a d m a y sc uff the p rint surfa c e .  
Cho o se On to p re ve nt sc uffing .  
This o p tio n c a n b e use d to  
O ff (De fa ult)  
te m p o ra rily c ha ng e the va lue  
se le c te d fo r Custom Pa p e r  
Se tting > Pla te n Ga p in the Pa p e r  
m e nu. No te , ho we ve r, tha t On  
ha s no e ffe c t whe n Wid e r is  
se le c te d fo r Pla te n Ga p .  
Drying  
Tim e Pe r  
Pa g e  
0 to 60 m inute s  
Sp e c ify ho w lo ng the p rinte r  
p a use s to a llo w the ink to d ry  
a fte r p rinting e a c h p a g e ;  
c ho o se fro m va lue s b e twe e n 0  
a nd 60 m inute s. De p e nd ing o n  
the ink d e nsity o r p a p e r typ e , the  
ink m a y ta ke a while to d ry. If the  
ink b lurs o n the p a p e r, se t a  
lo ng e r tim e fo r d rying the ink.  
The lo ng e r the d rying tim e , the  
m o re tim e re q uire d fo r p rinting .  
Using the Control Panel Menu 177  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
On (De fa ult)  
O ff  
Printe r Se tup  
(Co nt’d )  
Ad va nc e d  
Se tting s  
(Co nt’d )  
Pa p e r Size  
C he c k  
Cho o se whe the r the p rinte r  
a uto m a tic a lly d e te c ts (On) o r  
d o e s no t d e te c t (Off) the p a p e r  
wid th. Try c ho o sing Off if a p a p e r  
se tting e rro r is d isp la ye d whe n  
the p a p e r is c o rre c tly lo a d e d .  
No te , ho we ve r, tha t the p rinte r  
m a y p rint o utsid e the p a p e r  
whe n Off is se le c te d . If it p rints  
b e yo nd the e d g e s o f the p a p e r,  
the insid e o f the p rinte r b e c o m e s  
d irty with ink. We g e ne ra lly  
re c o m m e nd to o p e ra te with this  
se tting se t to On.  
Pa p e r  
Ske w  
C he c k  
O n (De fa ult)  
O ff  
If On is se le c te d , a n e rro r will b e  
d isp la ye d in the c o ntro l p a ne l  
a nd p rinting will sto p if the p a p e r  
is ske we d ; se le c t Off to d isa b le  
this fe a ture . On is re c o m m e nd e d  
in m o st c irc um sta nc e s a s  
ske we d p a p e r m a y c a use the  
p rinte r to ja m .  
Sto re He ld  
Jo b  
On  
This ite m is a va ila b le whe n a n  
o p tio na l ha rd d isk unit is insta lle d .  
If On is se le c te d , p rint jo b s tha t  
re q uire a p a p e r typ e , so urc e , o r  
o utp ut p a p e r size (wid th) tha t  
d iffe rs fro m tho se c urre ntly  
O ff (De fa ult)  
se le c te d with the p rinte r will b e  
sa ve d a s he ld jo b s; se le c t Off to  
d isa b le this fe a ture .  
If Off is se le c te d , a n e rro r will b e  
d isp la ye d a nd p rinting will sto p if  
the so urc e se le c te d fo r the p rint  
jo b d o e s no t m a tc h tha t  
se le c te d with the p rinte r.  
If On is se le c te d , p rinting will no t  
sto p if a n e rro r o c c urs; inste a d ,  
jo b s with no n-m a tc hing se tting s  
will b e sa ve d to the ha rd d isk unit  
a s he ld jo b s. He ld jo b s c a n b e  
p rinte d fro m the Print Q ue ue s  
m e nu a fte r the p rinte r ha s b e e n  
re a d ie d b y, fo r e xa m p le , lo a d ing  
the c o rre c t typ e o f p a p e r.  
Se e The Purp o se o f the Ha rd  
Disk Unit” o n p a g e 87.  
Re sto re Se tting s  
Ye s  
No  
Se le c t Ye s to re sto re a ll p rinte r  
se tting s to d e fa ult va lue s.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 178  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Printe r Sta tus  
Firm wa re Ve rsio n  
Op tio n Sta tus  
xxxxxxx,x.xx,xxxx  
Yo u c a n se e the firm wa re  
ve rsio n.  
Lists the o p tio na l a c c e sso rie s c urre ntly c o nne c te d to  
the p rinte r a nd a va ila b le fo r use .  
2
Sho w To ta l Prints  
Print Sta tus She e t  
XXXXXXX m  
Vie w the to ta l a re a p rinte d  
(six-fig ure m a xim um ).  
2
(XXXXXX ft )  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to p rint a list o f c urre nt p rinte r  
se tting s.  
Cho o se this o p tio n to vie w se tting s a t a g la nc e .  
Ne two rk  
Se tup  
IP Ad d re ss Se tting  
Auto (De fa ult)  
Pa ne l  
Se le c t whe the r to use DHCP to  
se t the IP a d d re ss (Auto), o r to se t  
the a d d re ss m a nua lly (Pa ne l).  
Cho o se Pa ne l to e nte r the IP  
a d d re ss, Sub ne t Ma sk, a nd  
De fa ult Ga te wa y. Co nta c t yo ur  
syste m a d m inistra to r fo r d e ta ile d  
info rm a tio n.  
Print Sta tus She e t  
Re sto re Se tting s  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to p rint a list o f ne two rk se tting s.  
Cho o se this o p tio n to vie w ne two rk se tting s a t a  
g la nc e .  
Ye s  
No  
Se le c t Ye s to re sto re a ll ne two rk  
se tting s to d e fa ult va lue s.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 179  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Po we r  
Se tting s  
Sle e p Mo d e  
5 to 180 m inute s  
The p rinte r e nte rs sle e p m o d e  
a uto m a tic a lly whe n the re a re no  
e rro rs, no p rint jo b s b e ing  
re c e ive d , a nd no c o ntro l p a ne l  
o r o the r o p e ra tio ns a re  
p e rfo rm e d fo r the se le c te d  
p e rio d . Use this o p tio n to c ho o se  
the p e rio d b e fo re the p rinte r  
e nte rs sle e p m o d e .  
Se e Turning Off the Po we r Using  
Po we r Off Tim e r” o n p a g e 83.  
Po we r Off Tim e r  
O ff  
The p rinte r turns o ff  
a uto m a tic a lly whe n the re a re no  
e rro rs, no p rint jo b s b e ing  
re c e ive d , a nd no c o ntro l p a ne l  
o r o the r o p e ra tio ns a re  
Off, 1 to 24 ho urs  
p e rfo rm e d fo r e ig ht ho urs.  
The d e la y b e fo re the p rinte r turns  
o ff c a n b e se le c te d fro m va lue s  
b e twe e n 1 a nd 24 ho urs in  
inc re m e nts o f 1 ho ur.  
Cho o se Off to p re ve nt the p rinte r  
turning o ff a uto m a tic a lly.  
Re sto re Se tting s  
La ng ua g e  
Ye s  
No  
Se le c t Ye s to re sto re a ll Powe r  
Se tting s to d e fa ult va lue s.  
Pre fe re nc e  
Ja p a ne se , Eng lish,  
Fre nc h, Ita lia n,  
G e rm a n,  
Se le c t the la ng ua g e use d o n the  
c o ntro l p a ne ls sc re e n.  
Po rtug ue se ,  
Sp a nish, Dutc h,  
Russia n, Ko re a n,  
Chine se  
Unit: Le ng th  
m (De fa ult)  
ft/ in  
Se le c t the unit o f le ng th whic h is  
d isp la ye d o n the c o ntro l p a ne ls  
sc re e n o r p rinte d o n the  
p a tte rns.  
Ale rt La m p Se tting  
O n (De fa ult)  
O ff  
C ho o se whe the r the la rg e a le rt  
la m p lig hts (On) o r d o e s no t lig ht  
(Off) whe n a n e rro r o c c urs.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 180  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Ad m inistra to r Cha ng e Pa sswo rd  
Me nu  
Ente r a n a d m inistra to r p a sswo rd o f up to 20 c ha ra c te rs.  
Se le c ting Ad m inistra to r Me nu d isp la ys a p a sswo rd  
p ro m p t. The Ad m inistra to r Me nu will o nly b e d isp la ye d if  
the c o rre c t p a sswo rd is e nte re d , p re ve nting  
no n-a d m inistra to rs fro m a c c id e nta lly c ha ng ing  
se tting s.  
Ke e p the p a sswo rd in a sa fe p la c e .  
Sho uld yo u fo rg o t the p a sswo rd , c o nta c t yo ur d e a le r o r  
Ep so n Sup p o rt.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 181  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Ad m inistra to r Op e ra tio na l Ne two rk  
Pa sswo rd Re q uire d  
Cho o se whe the r the  
Me nu  
(Co nt’d )  
Co ntro l  
Se tup  
a d m inistra to r p a sswo rd is  
re q uire d to a c c e ss Ne twork  
Se tup fro m the c o ntro l p a ne l o r  
Re m o te Ma na g e r.  
No Pa sswo rd  
Re q uire d (De fa ult)  
Po we r C le a ning  
Insp e c t the p rinte d p a tte rn a nd se le c t the c he c k b o xe s  
fo r p a tte rns with fa int o r m issing a re a s. To se le c t a ll  
no zzle s, p la c e a c he c k in the b o x o n the le ft.  
Ma na g e  
HDD  
Fo rm a t  
Ha rd Disk  
Ye s  
No  
Se le c t Ye s to fo rm a t the o p tio na l  
ha rd d isk unit c urre ntly a tta c he d  
to the p rinte r.  
Fo rm a tting the ha rd d isk unit  
d e le te s a ll sto re d p rint jo b s.  
Ha rd d isk units tha t ha ve b e e n  
use d with o the r p rinte rs m ust b e  
fo rm a tte d b e fo re the y c a n b e  
use d this p rinte r.  
Da te And Tim e  
MM/ DD/ YY HH:MM  
Se t the p rinte r’s b uilt-in c lo c k.  
The p rinte r c lo c k p ro vid e s the  
tim e s tha t a p p e a r in p rinto uts o f  
jo b info rm a tio n a nd p rinte r  
sta tus.  
Tim e Zo ne  
Ente r the d iffe re nc e b e twe e n the c urre nt tim e zo ne  
a nd G MT.  
The se le c te d tim e zo ne is use d in e -m a il no tific a tio ns  
se nt b y Re m o te Ma na g e r whe n a n e rro r o c c urs.  
Re se t All Se tting s  
Ye s  
No  
Se le c t Ye s to re sto re d e fa ults fo r  
a ll se tting s e xc e p t the Da te And  
Tim e , La ng ua g e , a nd Unit:  
Le ng th o p tio ns in the Se tup  
m e nu.  
Using the Control Panel Menu 182  
Enla rg e d Cop y m e nu  
The Enlarged Copy menu is displayed when a scanner is connected.  
Ite m  
De sc rip tion  
Co lo r (De fa ult)  
B&W  
C o lo r/ B&W  
Cho o se whe the r to c o p y in c o lo r o r in  
b la c k a nd white .  
Auto  
A3->Auto , B4->Auto ,  
A4->Auto , B5->Auto ,  
A5->Auto , LTR->Auto ,  
4x6->Auto ,  
With Bo rd e r  
(De fa ult)  
Do c um e nt size s a re liste d to the le ft o f  
the a rro ws. The c o p y is e nla rg e d to fit  
the wid th o f the ro ll c urre ntly lo a d e d in  
the p rinte r. The m a xim um size is 914 m m  
(36 inc he s). If a ro ll wid e r tha n 36 inc he s  
is lo a d e d in the Sure Co lo r T7000, the  
m a xim um size is still 36 inc he s.  
Bo rd e rle ss  
A4/ 2->Ba nne r(Auto )  
To p rint witho ut b o rd e rs, se le c t  
Bord e rle ss.  
The size s a va ila b le va ry with the  
sc a nne r.  
Othe r Size  
Do c um e nt  
Size  
A3, B4, A4, B5,  
A5, LTR, 4x6  
Se le c t the size o f the o rig ina l d o c um e nt  
whe n c o p ying a t o the r size s.  
The size s a va ila b le va ry with the  
sc a nne r.  
Outp ut Size  
A0, US E, B1, A1,  
US D, B2, US C,  
A2, A0  
Cho o se the o utp ut size whe n c o p ying  
a t o the r size s.  
A0(2She e ts) is a va ila b le o nly with the  
Sure C o lo r T3000.  
(2 She e ts)  
A0 is a va ila b le o nly with the Sure Co lo r  
T5000/ Sure C o lo r T7000.  
Bo rd e r  
With Bo rd e r  
Bo rd e rle ss  
Dra ft  
To p rint witho ut b o rd e rs, se le c t  
Bord e rle ss.  
Qua lity  
De nsity  
Cho o se c o p y q ua lity a nd p rint sp e e d .  
Cho o se c o p y d e nsity.  
Fine  
Five o p tio ns  
fro m Lig ht to  
Da rk  
Using the Control Panel Menu 183  
Cha p te r 9  
Ma inte na nc e  
Ad justing the Print He a d  
You need to adjust the print head if white lines appear in your printouts or if you notice the  
print quality has declined. You can perform the following printer maintenance functions for  
maintaining the print head in good condition to ensure the best print quality.  
Carry out appropriate maintenance depending on the print results and situation.  
Checking for clogged nozzles  
Perform a nozzle check to check for clogs if the printer has not been used for an extended  
period or before important print jobs. Visually inspect the printed check pattern and clean  
the print head if you notice faint or missing areas.  
Cleaning the print head  
Clean the print head if you notice faint or missing areas in printed documents. Cleans the  
surface of the print head to improve the print quality. Choose normal or power cleaning  
according to the level of cleaning required.  
See “Cleaning the print head” on page 187.  
Normal cleaning is recommended in most circumstances. Use power cleaning if the  
nozzles remain clogged after normal cleaning has been performed several times.  
Adjusting the print head position (Print head alignment)  
Perform Head Alignment if lines are misaligned or print results are grainy. The Head  
Alignment function corrects print misalignments.  
See “Minimizing Print Misalignments (Head Alignment)” on page 189.  
Che c king for c log g e d nozzle s  
Nozzle Che c k  
Nozzle checks can be performing from a computer or using the printer’s control panel.  
Maintenance 184  
Fro m the c o m p ute r  
Explanations in this section use the Windows printer driver as an example.  
Use Epson Printer Utility 4 for Mac OS X.  
See “Epson Printer Utility 4 Functions” on page 161.  
1. Make sure that the roll paper or a cut sheet of A4 size or larger is loaded in the printer.  
Make sure you set the paper source and media type correctly according to the paper  
you use.  
2. Click Nozzle Check from the Utility tab in the printer driver’s Properties (or Printing  
preferences) screen.  
3. Click Print.  
The nozzle check pattern is printed.  
4. Check the nozzle check pattern.  
If there is no problem: click Finish.  
If there is a problem: click Clean.  
After printing a nozzle check pattern, make sure that the nozzle check pattern printing  
is complete before printing your data or cleaning the print head.  
Maintenance 185  
Fro m the p rinte r  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Make sure that the roll paper or a cut sheet of A4 size or larger is loaded in the printer.  
Make sure you set the paper source and media type correctly according to the paper  
you use.  
2. Confirm that the printer is ready to print. Press the " button.  
The Maintenance menu will be displayed.  
3. Confirm that Nozzle Check is highlighted and press the OK button.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
4. Press the OK button to print a check pattern.  
Review the printed check pattern while referring to the following section.  
Example of clean nozzles  
There are no gaps in the nozzle check pattern.  
Example of clogged nozzles  
If there are areas missing from the pattern, select Head Cleaning and clean the print  
head. See “Cleaning the print head” on page 187.  
Maintenance 186  
Cle a ning the p rint he a d  
Although head cleaning can be performed from the computer or the printer, the cleaning  
procedures differ as explained below.  
O From the computer  
All nozzles are cleaned.  
O From the printer  
You can clean all nozzles or select for cleaning only those nozzles for which the printed  
nozzle check pattern indicates a problem.  
Note s on he a d c le a ning  
Note the following points when performing head cleaning.  
O Clean the print head only if print quality declines; for example, if the printout is blurry or  
the color is incorrect or missing. Ink is consumed when head cleaning is performed.  
O Cleaning all nozzles consumes some of each color of ink. Even if you are using only  
black inks for black and white printing, color inks are also consumed.  
O When repeating head cleaning in a short time period, the Maintenance Box may fill up  
quickly due to a small amount of ink evaporation in the Maintenance Box. Prepare a  
spare Maintenance Box if there is not enough empty space in the box.  
O If the nozzles are still clogged after cleaning the print head several times, we  
recommend trying power cleaning.  
O Power cleaning consumes more ink than normal head cleaning. Check the remaining  
ink level in advance, and prepare a new ink cartridge before you start cleaning if the ink  
is low.  
O If the nozzles are still clogged after performing power cleaning, turn off the printer and  
leave it overnight or longer. When left for some time, the clogged ink may dissolve.  
If the nozzles are still clogged, contact your dealer or Epson Support.  
Cle a ning the p rint he a d  
From the computer  
Explanations in this section use the Windows printer driver as an example.  
Use Epson Printer Utility 4 for Mac OS X.  
Maintenance 187  
See “Using Epson Printer Utility 4” on page 161.  
1. Click Head Cleaning from the Utility tab in the printer driver’s Properties (or Printing  
preferences) screen.  
2. Click Start.  
Head cleaning starts and it takes about one to ten minutes.  
3. Click Print Nozzle Check Pattern.  
Confirm the nozzle check pattern.  
If any segments are missing in the nozzle check pattern, click Clean.  
From the printer  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Confirm that the printer is ready to print. Press the " button.  
The Maintenance menu will be displayed.  
2. Press the d/u buttons to highlight Head Cleaning and press the OK button.  
You will be prompted to choose nozzle rows.  
Maintenance 188  
3. Select nozzle rows for cleaning.  
Press the l/r buttons to highlight numbers corresponding to check patterns with faint  
or missing segments and press the d/u button to select.  
You can select multiple nozzle rows.  
To select all nozzles, place a check in the box on the left.  
4. Pressing the OK button displays a confirmation message. Press the OK button to start  
head cleaning.  
A confirmation message is displayed when cleaning is complete.  
5. To print a check pattern and check the status of the clog, press the d/u buttons to  
highlight Nozzle Check and press the OK button.  
To exit without performing a nozzle check, highlight Exit and press the OK button.  
Minim izing Print Misa lig nm e nts (He a d Alig nm e nt)  
Because there is a small distance between the print head and paper, misalignment may  
occur due to humidity or temperature, the inertial force of the print head’s movements, or  
by moving the print head bidirectionally. This may result in grainy prints or lines that are  
incorrectly placed. When this happens, perform Head Alignment to correct the print  
misalignment.  
Although Head Alignment can be performed from the computer or the printer, the  
alignment procedures differ as explained below.  
O From the printer  
Head alignment can be performed automatically or manually.  
In auto adjustment, the sensor reads the adjustment pattern while it is printing, and  
automatically registers the optimum adjustment value to the printer.  
Auto head alignment takes about 30 minutes to complete.  
In manual adjustment, you need to check the pattern and enter the optimum adjustment  
value for alignment. Manual alignment can be used with cut sheets or other paper that  
does not support auto alignment or if auto alignment does not fix the problem  
completely.  
Printing the pattern for manual head alignment takes from 7 to 11 minutes. The time  
required varies with the size of the pattern printed.  
Maintenance 189  
Uni-D and Bi-D head alignment is available in both auto and manual modes. Bi-D is  
recommended in most circumstances. Choose Uni-D if Bi-D head alignment does not  
completely fix the problem.  
O From the computer  
A computer can be used for auto head alignment.  
In most cases, head alignment can be performed successfully with just this operation.  
We normally recommend this method as this is the simplest method. Auto head  
alignment takes about 30 minutes to complete. Manual head alignment can be  
performed from the printer’s control panel if you are using cut sheets or other paper that  
does not support auto alignment or if auto alignment does to fix the problem completely.  
Note:  
Head Alignment is adjusted according to the paper currently loaded in the printer. Load the  
paper for which head alignment is required.  
Note, however, that auto head alignment is not available with the paper or in the circumstances  
listed below.  
O Transparent or colored media is loaded in the printer.  
O The paper loaded in the printer does not support auto head alignment.  
See “Epson Special Media Table” on page 224 for information on the types of paper that  
support auto head alignment.  
O The current paper is more than 1.0 mm thick.  
O The printer is exposed to direct sunlight or another light source that causes optical  
interference. Block the offending light source.  
Head Alignment may also fail to produce the desired results if nozzles are clogged. Perform  
head cleaning to clear any clogs before proceeding.  
From the computer  
Explanations in this section use the Windows printer driver as an example.  
Use Epson Printer Utility 4 for Mac OS X.  
See “Using Epson Printer Utility 4” on page 161.  
1. Load roll paper in the printer.  
Choose a paper type that matches the paper in the printer.  
2. Click Print Head Alignment from the Utility tab in the printer driver’s Properties (or  
Printing preferences) screen.  
Maintenance 190  
Follow the on-screen instructions to align the print head.  
The sensor reads the adjustment pattern while it is printing, and automatically registers  
the optimum adjustment value to the printer.  
From the printer  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Make sure that the roll paper or a cut sheet of A4 size or larger is loaded in the printer.  
Make sure you set the paper source and media type correctly according to the paper  
you use.  
2. Confirm that the printer is ready to print. Press the l/r buttons to highlight - and press  
the OK button.  
The Maintenance menu will be displayed.  
3. Press the d/u buttons to select Head Alignment, and then press the OK button.  
4. Press the d/u buttons to highlight a head alignment option.  
5. Press the OK button to print an adjustment pattern.  
Maintenance 191  
If Auto is selected, the printer will automatically align the head as it prints the head  
alignment pattern. The Maintenance menu will be displayed when head alignment is  
complete.  
If Manual is selected, proceed to step 6 to enter adjustment based on a visual  
inspection of the pattern.  
6. Note the numbers of the patterns with the fewest white lines or in which the white lines  
are most evenly spaced.  
This would be pattern 3 of the example shown in the illustration.  
7. After confirming that C1 is displayed in the control panel’s screen, press the d/u  
buttons to select the number noted in step 6 and press the OK button.  
8. Repeat for all colors from C1 to BK2, pressing the OK button each time.  
9. The Maintenance menu will be displayed once the last number has been entered.  
Maintenance 192  
Re p la c ing Consum a b le s  
Re p la c ing Ink Ca rtrid g e s  
If one of the installed ink cartridges is expended, printing cannot be performed. If an ink low  
warning is displayed, we recommend replacing the ink cartridge(s) as soon as possible.  
If an ink cartridge runs out while printing, you can continue printing after replacing the ink  
cartridge. However, when replacing ink during a print job, you may see a difference in color  
depending on the drying conditions.  
Supported ink cartridges, see “Options and Consumable Products” on page 222.  
How to re p la c e  
You can use the same procedure to replace all ink cartridges.  
Important:  
Epson recommends the use of genuine Epson ink cartridges. Epson cannot guarantee the  
quality or reliability of non-genuine ink. The use of non-genuine ink may cause damage that is  
not covered by Epson’s warranties, and under certain circumstances, may cause erratic printer  
behavior. Information about non-genuine ink levels may not be displayed, and use of  
non-genuine ink is recorded for possible use in service support.  
1. Make sure the printer is on.  
2. Open the cartridge cover.  
Maintenance 193  
3. Hook a finger into the indentation on top of the ink cartridge and pull it straight out.  
Important:  
Removed ink cartridges may have ink around the ink supply port, so be careful not  
to get any ink on the surrounding area when removing the cartridges.  
4. Remove the new ink cartridge from the bag. Shake the ink cartridge for 10 seconds 30  
times horizontally in approximately 5 cm movements as shown in the illustration.  
Important:  
Do not touch the IC chips on the tops of the ink cartridges. You may not be able to  
print properly.  
5. Holding the cartridge with the label out, slide it all the way into the slot.  
Maintenance 194  
Match the color of the ink cartridge to the color of the label on the printer.  
Repeat steps 3 to 5 to replace other ink cartridges.  
Important:  
Install all ink cartridges into each slot. You cannot print if any of the slots are empty.  
6. Close the cartridge cover.  
Important:  
We recommend that you remove and shake the installed ink cartridges once every three months  
to ensure print quality.  
Re p la c ing Ma inte na nc e Boxe s  
If the message Not Enough Space is displayed, replace the specified Maintenance Box.  
Supported Maintenance Boxes  
See “Options and Consumable Products” on page 222.  
Maintenance 195  
Important:  
Do not reuse maintenance boxes that have been removed and left out in the open for a long  
period of time. The pad on the inside will be dry and hard and will be unable to absorb enough  
ink.  
How to re p la c e  
Some printer models have Maintenance Boxes on both the left and right sides, but the  
procedure for replacing the boxes is the same in all cases.  
Important:  
Do not replace Maintenance Box while printing. Waste ink may leak.  
1. Open the maintenance box cover.  
2. Pull the Maintenance Box out.  
Lifting the Maintenance Box up releases the lock, and you can simply pull it straight out.  
Maintenance 196  
3. Place the used Maintenance Box in the clear bag included with your new Maintenance  
Box, and make sure that the zipper is closed tight.  
4. Install the new Maintenance Box.  
Important:  
Do not touch the IC chip on the side of Maintenance Box. Doing so may prevent  
normal operation and printing.  
5. Close the maintenance box cover.  
Re p la c ing the Cutte r  
Replace the cutter when it is not cutting paper cleanly.  
Supported cutter  
See “Options and Consumable Products” on page 222.  
Use a cross-head screwdriver to replace the cutter. Make sure you have a cross-head  
screwdriver with you before replacing the cutter.  
Important:  
Take care not to damage the cutter blade. Dropping it or knocking it against hard objects may  
chip the blade.  
Maintenance 197  
Buttons that are used in the following settings:  
1. Remove any paper from the printer.  
See “Removing the roll paper” on page 41, “Removing Cut Sheets” on page 46, or  
“Removing Poster Board” on page 52.  
2. Confirm that the printer is ready to print. Press the l/r buttons to highlight - and press  
the OK button.  
The Maintenance menu will be displayed.  
3. Press the d/u buttons to highlight Cutter Maintenance and press the OK button.  
4. Press the d/u buttons to highlight Replace Cutter and press the OK button.  
5. The cutter will move to the replacement position.  
6. Remove the old cutter from the printer.  
Loosen the screw holding the cutter in place using a cross-head screwdriver and pull  
the cutter straight out.  
Maintenance 198  
Caution:  
Do not store the cutter within the reach of children. The cutter’s blade could  
cause an injury. Pay careful attention when replacing the cutter.  
c
7. Install the new cutter.  
Insert the cutter so that the pin on the printer matches up with the hole on the cutter.  
Use a cross-head screwdriver to tighten down the screw to hold the cutter in place.  
Maintenance 199  
Important:  
Screw up the cutter firmly, otherwise the cut position may be slightly shifted or  
skewed.  
8. After replacing the cutter, press the OK button.  
The cutter will return to its original position.  
Ready is displayed in the control panel when the process is complete.  
Maintenance 200  
Cle a ning the Printe r  
To keep your printer in optimum operating condition, clean it (about once a month).  
Cle a ning the outsid e  
1. Remove any paper from the printer.  
2. Make sure the printer is turned off and the screen has turned off, and then unplug the  
power cable from the electrical outlet.  
3. Use a soft, clean cloth to carefully remove any dust or dirt.  
If there is a serious dirt problem, clean it using a soft, clean cloth dampened with a mild  
detergent. Then wipe off with a dry, soft cloth.  
Important:  
Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the printer. They could cause  
discoloration and deformities.  
Cle a ning the insid e  
Clean the pressure rollers if prints are smudged or soiled.  
Ink and particles of paper adhering to the platen should be removed, as they may  
otherwise soil the paper.  
Important:  
Failure to remove dust and particles of paper from the platen could result in clogged nozzles or  
damage to the print head.  
Cle a ning the rolle r  
Follow the steps below to clean the roller by feeding plain paper.  
1. Turn on the printer, and load it with widest available roll paper.  
See “Loading and Removing the Roll Paper” on page 32.  
2. Press the ) button followed by the d button.  
Maintenance 201  
Paper is fed while the d button is pressed. If the paper is not soiled, cleaning is  
complete.  
Cut the paper after cleaning is done.  
See “Manual cut method” on page 39.  
Cle a ning insid e  
1. Make sure the printer is turned off and the screen has turned off, and then unplug the  
power cable from the electrical outlet.  
2. Leave the printer for a minute.  
3. Open the printer cover and use a soft, clean cloth to carefully clean away any dust or  
dirt inside the printer.  
Thoroughly clean area (a), shown in blue in the illustration below. To avoid spreading  
the dirt, wipe from the inside to the outside. If there is a serious dirt problem, clean it  
using a soft, clean cloth dampened with a mild detergent. Then, wipe the inside of the  
printer with a dry, soft cloth.  
Important:  
O Be sure not to touch the roller or the ink absorbing areas (b, shown in gray) during  
cleaning; otherwise, prints may be soiled.  
O Be careful not to touch the ink tubes inside the printer, otherwise, the printer may  
be damaged.  
Maintenance 202  
4. If any paper particles (that looks like white powder) accumulates on the platen, use  
something like a cocktail stick to push it in.  
5. When you have finished cleaning, close the printer cover.  
Maintenance 203  
Cha p te r 10  
Prob le m Solve r  
Wha t to Do Whe n a Me ssa g e Is Disp la ye d  
If the printer displays one of the messages shown below, refer to the solution listed and  
take the necessary steps.  
Me ssa g e  
Wha t to d o  
Ink C a rtrid g e Erro r  
O
O
Re m o ve a nd re inse rt the ink c a rtrid g e . If the m e ssa g e p e rsists, inse rt  
a ne w ink c a rtrid g e (d o no t re insta ll the c a rtrid g e tha t c a use d the  
e rro r).  
Ink c a rtrid g e c a nno t b e  
re c o g nize d . Inse rt a g a in o r  
re p la c e ink c a rtrid g e .  
Se e Ho w to re p la c e ” o n p a g e 193.  
Ink C a rtrid g e Erro r  
Co nd e nsa tio n m a y o c c ur in the ink c a rtrid g e . Le a ve it a t ro o m  
te m p e ra ture fo r a t le a st fo ur ho urs b e fo re insta lling the ink  
c a rtrid g e .  
Ink c a rtrid g e c a nno t b e  
d e te c te d . Inse rt a g a in o r  
re p la c e ink c a rtrid g e .  
Se e No te s o n ha nd ling ink c a rtrid g e s” o n p a g e 25.  
Ink C a rtrid g e Erro r  
Ple a se insta ll the c o rre c t ink  
c a rtrid g e .  
Inse rt a g e nuine Ep so n ink c a rtrid g e a p p ro ve d fo r use in the p rinte r.  
Se e O p tio ns a nd C o nsum a b le Pro d uc ts” o n p a g e 222.  
Se e Re p la c ing Ink Ca rtrid g e s” o n p a g e 193.  
Ink Lo w  
The ink is lo w. Re a d y a ne w ink c a rtrid g e .  
Se e O p tio ns a nd C o nsum a b le Pro d uc ts” o n p a g e 222.  
F/ W Insta ll Erro r  
Firm wa re up d a te fa ile d .  
Re sta rt the p rinte r.  
Turn the p rinte r o ff, wa it fo r a fe w m inute s, a nd the n turn o n the p rinte r  
a g a in.  
Use EPSON LFP Re m o te Pa ne l 2 to re -a tte m p t the up d a te .  
If this m e ssa g e a p p e a rs o n the LCD p a ne l a g a in, c o nta c t yo ur d e a le r  
o r Ep so n Sup p o rt.  
Co m m a nd Erro r  
Pre ss the W b utto n a nd se le c t Job Ca nc e l to sto p p rinting . C o nfirm  
Che c k d rive r se tting s.  
tha t the p rinte r d rive r yo u a re using sup p o rts this p rinte r.  
Re e l Unit Erro r  
Che c k Auto Ta ke -up Re e l  
Unit a nd re sta rt p rinte r.  
Turn the p rinte r o ff, wa it fo r a fe w m inute s, a nd the n turn o n the p rinte r  
a g a in.  
If this m e ssa g e a p p e a rs o n the LCD p a ne l a g a in, c o nta c t yo ur d e a le r  
o r Ep so n Sup p o rt.  
Re e l Unit Erro r  
Afte r re c o nne c ting the c a b le c o nne c ting the a uto ta ke -up re e l unit to  
the p rinte r, turn the p rinte r o ff a nd the n o n a g a in.  
Co nne c t Auto Ta ke -up  
Re e l Unit c a b le a nd re sta rt  
p rinte r.  
Se e the Se tup G uid e sup p lie d with the o p tio na l a uto ta ke -up re e l unit.  
Problem Solver 204  
Me ssa g e  
Wha t to d o  
Auto Ta ke -up Re e l Unit is  
d isc o nne c te d . Do yo u  
c o ntinue ?  
The a uto ta ke -up re e l unit is no t c o nne c te d . Afte r re c o nne c ting the  
c a b le c o nne c ting the a uto ta ke -up re e l unit to the p rinte r, se le c t No to  
turn the p rinte r o ff. Turn the p rinte r o n a g a in a fte r a sho rt p a use .  
Se e the Se tup G uid e sup p lie d with the o p tio na l a uto ta ke -up re e l unit.  
To c o ntinue p rinting witho ut using the a uto ta ke -up re e l unit, se le c t  
Ye s.  
Ta ke -Up Erro r  
Afte r c he c king the ta ke -up re e l unit se nso r a nd re m o ving a ny  
Is a nything o b struc ting the  
ta ke -up re e l se nso r syste m ?  
o b struc tio ns, p re ss the OK b utto n.  
If the re is lo o se p a p e r a ro und the ta ke -up re e l unit ro ll c o re , se t the  
Auto switc h to Off a nd ke e p the Ma nua l p re sse d in the ta ke -up  
d ire c tio n to re m o ve the sla c k. Afte r c o nfirm ing tha t the p a p e r is  
c o rre c tly a tta c he d , re turn the Auto switc h to its o rig ina l p o sitio n a nd  
p re ss the OK b utto n.  
Se e Using the Auto Ta ke -up Re e l Unit (Sure Co lo r T7000 Only)” o n p a g e  
61.  
HDD Erro r  
Op tio na l ha rd d isk units tha t ha ve b e e n insta lle d o n o the r d e vic e s m ust  
b e fo rm a tte d a fte r b e ing tra nsfe rre d to this p rinte r. The d isk c a nno t b e  
use d until it is fo rm a tte d . To fo rm a t the d isk, use the Se tup m e nu in the  
c o ntro l p a ne l.  
HDD use d fo r a no the r  
p rinte r ne e d s to b e  
fo rm a tte d . Co ntinue ?  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
Sto ra g e Erro r  
Pre ss the W b utto n a nd se le c t Job Ca nc e l to sto p p rinting . Re m o ve  
Che c k if ha rd d isk unit is  
c o rre c tly insta lle d .  
a nd re insta ll the ha rd d isk unit.  
If this m e ssa g e a p p e a rs o n the LCD p a ne l a g a in, c o nta c t yo ur d e a le r  
o r Ep so n Sup p o rt.  
To p rint re g a rd le ss o f ha rd d isk sta tus, se le c t the Ad va nc e d ta b in the  
p rinte r d rive r, o p e n the Se tting s d ia lo g o f Ha rd Disk Unit, a nd se le c t  
Print only.  
Pa p e r Cut Erro r  
Afte r p re ssing the OK b utto n, p ull o ut the p a p e r a nd c ut a lo ng the line  
Re m o ve unc ut p a p e r.  
o f the fa ile d c ut using sc issors o r a third -p a rty c utte r.  
Alig n the e nd o f the p a p e r with a ll the p o ste r b o a rd sup p o rts a nd p re ss  
the OK b utto n.  
Da ta Size Erro r  
Da ta size o f p rint jo b is to o  
la rg e .  
The o p tio na l ha rd d isk unit c a n sto re p rint jo b s up to 100 G B in size . To  
p rint la rg e r jo b s, se le c t the Ad va nc e d ta b in the p rinte r d rive r, o p e n  
the Se tting s d ia lo g o f Ha rd Disk Unit, a nd se le c t Print only; a lte rna tive ly,  
e nsure tha t p rint jo b s a re le ss tha n 100 G B in size .  
Che c k o n p rint jo b .  
HDD Sto re Erro r  
Ha rd d isk d o e s no t ha ve  
e no ug h sp a c e .  
Se e d o c um e nta tio n fo r  
ho w to d e le te sto re d p rint  
jo b s.  
Unwa nte d jo b s c a n b e d e le te d fro m Re m o te Ma na g e r o r the LFP HDD  
Utility.  
Se e Using the Op tio na l Ha rd Disk Unit” o n p a g e 87.  
HDD Bo o t Erro r  
Ha rd d isk e rro r. Ha rd d isk  
c a nno t b e use d .  
Pre ss the OK b utto n to c le a r the e rro r fro m the c o ntro l p a ne l. To  
c o ntinue p rinting re g a rd le ss o f ha rd d isk sta tus, se le c t Print Only fo r  
Ha rd Disk Unit Se tting s in the p rinte r d rive r.  
If this m e ssa g e a p p e a rs o n the LCD p a ne l a g a in, c o nta c t yo ur d e a le r  
o r Ep so n Sup p o rt.  
Problem Solver 205  
Me ssa g e  
Wha t to d o  
C o p y Erro r  
Ca nno t sta rt c o p y with this  
p rinte r se tting .  
The p rinte r will b e una b le to d e te rm ine the size o f the c urre nt p a p e r  
a nd m a ke e nla rg e d c o p ie s whe n Off is se le c te d fo r Pa p e r Size Che c k  
in the Se tup m e nu. Se le c t On fo r Pa p e r Size Che c k in the Se tup m e nu.  
Re fe r to m a nua l fo r d e ta ils.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
Sc a nne r Erro r  
Re fe r to sc a nne r m a nua l fo r  
d e ta ils.  
O
O
Re le a se the sc a nne r tra nsp o rta tio n lo c k a nd turn the p rinte r a nd  
sc a nne r o ff a nd the n o n a g a in.  
Turn the d e vic e s o n a nd o ff se ve ra l tim e s. The sc a nne r c a n b e use d  
whe n the m e ssa g e is no lo ng e r d isp la ye d .  
If this m e ssa g e a p p e a rs o n the LCD p a ne l a g a in, c o nta c t yo ur d e a le r  
o r Ep so n Sup p o rt.  
He ld Jo b s Lim it  
The num b e r o f he ld jo b s ha s re a c he d 200.  
He ld jo b s q ue ue full.  
Pre ss the OK b utto n a nd se le c t Re sum e All Job s.  
Se e Using the Op tio na l Ha rd Disk Unit” o n p a g e 87.  
Pa p e r Size Erro r  
The lo a d e d p a p e r wid th is no t sup p o rte d . Pre ss the OK b utto n a nd  
Lo a d e d p a p e r is no t  
sup p o rte d size .  
re m o ve the p a p e r.  
Pa p e r fo r use in the p rinte r m ust b e a t le a st 10 inc he s (254 m m ) wid e .  
Use p a p e r tha t is a t le a st 10 inc he s (254 m m ) wid e .  
Sho uld this m e ssa g e b e d isp la ye d with p a p e r o f a wid th tha t c a n b e  
use d in the p rinte r, yo u m a y b e a b le to p rint if yo u se le c t Off fo r Pa p e r  
Size Che c k in the Se tup m e nu.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
Pa p e r Se nso r Erro r  
Lo a d e d p a p e r o r p rinto ut  
ha s a p ro b le m .  
Re fe r to the m a nua l fo r  
d e ta ils.  
Pre ss the W b utto n to c le a r the e rro r fro m the c o ntro l p a ne l.  
If this e rro r is d isp la ye d whe n p e rfo rm ing a uto m a tic he a d a lig nm e nt,  
c he c k the fo llo wing ite m s.  
O
O
Do e s the p a p e r sup p o rt a uto he a d a lig nm e nt?  
He a d a lig nm e nt is no t a va ila b le with tra nsp a re nt o r c o lo re d  
m e d ia , tra c ing p a p e r, p a p e r no t sup p o rte d b y the a uto he a d  
a lig nm e nt func tio n, o r p a p e r tha t is m o re tha n 1.0 m m thic k.  
Se e Ep so n Sp e c ia l Me d ia Ta b le ” o n p a g e 224 fo r info rm a tio n o n  
the typ e s o f p a p e r tha t sup p o rt a uto he a d a lig nm e nt.  
Is the p rinte r e xp o se d to a lig ht so urc e tha t inte rfe re s with a uto  
he a d a lig nm e nt?  
Sha d e the p rinte r fro m d ire c t sunlig ht o r o the r lig ht so urc e s tha t  
c a use o p tic a l inte rfe re nc e .  
O
O
Are the d e fa ult va lue s se le c te d fo r b o th Pla te n Ga p a nd Le ss He a d  
Sc uffing ?  
Re sto re b o th ite m s to the ir d e fa ult va lue s.  
Are so m e p rint he a d no zzle s c lo g g e d ?  
Pe rfo rm he a d c le a ning . Se e Cle a ning the p rint he a d ” o n p a g e  
187.  
If this e rro r is d isp la ye d in c irc um sta nc e s o the r tha n tho se liste d a b o ve ,  
c he c k tha t the p rinte r sup p o rts the c urre nt p a p e r.  
Problem Solver 206  
Whe n a Ma inte na nc e Ca ll/ Se rvic e Ca ll Oc c urs  
Error m e ssa g e s  
Wha t to d o  
Ma inte na nc e Re q ue st  
Re p la c e Pa rt So o n/ Re p la c e Pa rt  
No w  
A p a rt use d in the p rinte r is ne a ring the e nd o f its se rvic e life .  
Co nta c t yo ur d e a le r o r Ep so n Sup p o rt a nd te ll the m the  
m a inte na nc e re q ue st c o d e .  
XXXXXXXX  
Yo u c a nno t c le a r the m a inte na nc e re q ue st until the p a rt is  
re p la c e d . A se rvic e c a ll o c c urs if yo u c o ntinue to use the  
p rinte r.  
C a ll Fo r Se rvic e  
A c a ll fo r se rvic e o c c urs whe n:  
XXXX Erro r XXXX  
O
O
The p o we r c a b le is no t c o nne c te d se c ure ly  
An e rro r tha t c a nno t b e c le a re d o c c urs  
Po we r o ff a nd the n o n. If this  
d o e snt wo rk, no te the c o d e  
a nd c a ll fo r se rvic e .  
Whe n a c a ll fo r se rvic e ha s o c c urre d , the p rinte r a uto m a tic a lly  
sto p s p rinting . Turn o ff the p rinte r, d isc o nne c t the p o we r c a b le  
fro m the o utle t a nd fro m the AC inle t o n the p rinte r, a nd the n  
re c o nne c t. Turn o n the p rinte r a g a in m ultip le tim e s.  
If the sa m e c a ll fo r se rvic e is d isp la ye d o n the LC D p a ne l,  
c o nta c t yo ur d e a le r o r Ep so n Sup p o rt fo r a ssista nc e . Te ll the m  
the c a ll fo r se rvic e c o d e is "XXXX".  
Call-for-Service Codes  
The characters indicated by asterisks (*) vary with the type of error.  
C a rria g e e rro r  
Pa p e r fe e d e rro r  
Circ uit e rro r  
11**  
12**  
00**, 13**, 1A**, 1F**, 20**, 3000, Dx**,  
Fx**  
Ink syste m e rro r  
14**, 162*, 1900  
110*, 143*  
15**  
Re p la c e m e nt p a rt re q uire d  
Me c ha nic a l e rro r  
Problem Solver 207  
Troub le shooting  
You c a nnot p rint (b e c a use the p rinte r d oe s not work)  
The p rinte r d oe s not turn on.  
o
Is the p owe r c a b le p lug g e d into the e le c tric a l outle t or the p rinte r?  
Ma ke sure the p o we r c a b le is se c ure ly p lug g e d into the p rinte r.  
o
Is the re a p rob le m with the p owe r outle t?  
Ma ke sure yo ur o utle t wo rks b y c o nne c ting the p o we r c a b le fo r a no the r e le c tric p ro d uc t.  
The p rinte r turns off a utom a tic a lly.  
o
Is Powe r Off Tim e r e na b le d ?  
To p re ve nt the p rinte r turning o ff a uto m a tic a lly, se le c t Off.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
The p rinte r d rive r is not insta lle d p rop e rly (Wind ows).  
o
Is the ic on for this p rinte r d isp la ye d in the De vic e s a nd Printe rs, Printe r, Printe rs a nd Fa xe s fold e r?  
O
Ye s  
The p rinte r d rive r is insta lle d .  
O
No  
The p rinte r d rive r is no t insta lle d . Insta ll the p rinte r d rive r.  
o
Doe s the p rinte r p ort se tting m a tc h the p rinte r c onne c tion p ort?  
C he c k the p rinte r p o rt.  
C lic k the Port ta b in the p rinte r Pro p e rtie s d ia lo g a nd c he c k the o p tio n se le c te d fo r Print to  
following p ort(s).  
O
O
USB: USB xxx (x sta nd s fo r the p o rt num b e r) fo r the USB c o nne c tio n  
Ne two rk: The c o rre c t IP a d d re ss fo r the ne two rk c o nne c tio n  
If it is no t ind ic a te d , the p rinte r d rive r is no t insta lle d c o rre c tly. De le te a nd re insta ll the p rinte r  
d rive r.  
Se e Uninsta lling the Printe r Drive r” o n p a g e 158.  
Problem Solver 208  
The p rinte r d rive r is not insta lle d p rop e rly (Ma c OS X).  
o
Is the p rinte r a d d e d to the p rinte r list?  
Se le c t Syste m Pre fe re nc e s > Print & Sc a n (o r Print & Fa x) fro m the Ap p le m e nu.  
If the p rinte r na m e is no t d isp la ye d , a d d the p rinte r.  
The p rinte r is not c om m unic a ting with the c om p ute r.  
o
Is the c a b le p lug g e d in p rop e rly?  
C o nfirm tha t the inte rfa c e c a b le is se c ure ly c o nne c te d to b o th the p rinte r p o rt a nd the  
c o m p ute r. Also , m a ke sure the c a b le is no t b ro ke n no r b e nt. If yo u ha ve a sp a re c a b le , try  
c o nne c ting with the sp a re c a b le .  
o
Doe s the inte rfa c e c a b le sp e c ific a tion m a tc h the sp e c ific a tions for the c om p ute r?  
Ma ke sure the inte rfa c e c a b le sp e c ific a tio ns m a tc h the sp e c ific a tio ns fo r the p rinte r a nd the  
c o m p ute r.  
Se e Syste m Re q uire m e nts” o n p a g e 233.  
o
o
Whe n using a USB hub , is it b e ing use d c orre c tly?  
In the USB sp e c ific a tio n, d a isy-c ha ins o f up to five USB hub s a re p o ssib le . Ho we ve r, we  
re c o m m e nd tha t yo u c o nne c t the p rinte r to the first hub c o nne c te d d ire c tly to the c o m p ute r.  
De p e nd ing o n the hub yo u a re using , the o p e ra tio n o f the p rinte r m a y b e c o m e unsta b le . If this  
sho uld o c c ur, p lug the USB c a b le d ire c tly into yo ur c o m p ute r’s USB p o rt.  
Is the USB hub re c og nize d c orre c tly?  
Ma ke sure the USB hub is re c o g nize d c o rre c tly o n the c o m p ute r. If the c o m p ute r c o rre c tly  
d e te c ts the USB hub , d isc o nne c t a ll USB hub s fro m the c o m p ute r a nd c o nne c t the p rinte r d ire c tly  
to the c o m p ute r USB p o rt. Ask the USB hub m a nufa c ture r a b o ut USB hub o p e ra tio n.  
You c a nnot p rint und e r the ne twork e nvironm e nt.  
o
Are the ne twork se tting s c orre c t?  
Ask yo ur ne two rk a d m inistra to r fo r the ne two rk se tting s.  
o
Conne c t the p rinte r d ire c tly to the c om p ute r using a USB c a b le , a nd the n try to p rint.  
If yo u a re a b le to p rint via USB, the re is a p ro b le m with ne two rk se tting s. Ask yo ur syste m  
a d m inistra to r, o r re fe r to the d o c um e nta tio n fo r yo ur ne two rk syste m . If yo u c a nno t p rint via USB,  
se e the a p p ro p ria te se c tio n in this Use r’s G uid e .  
Problem Solver 209  
The p rinte r ha s a n e rror.  
o
Vie w the m e ssa g e d isp la ye d in the c ontrol p a ne l.  
Se e Co ntro l p a ne l” o n p a g e 15.  
Se e Wha t to Do Whe n a Me ssa g e Is Disp la ye d ” o n p a g e 204.  
The p rinte r stop s p rinting .  
o
Is the sta tus of p rint q ue ue Pa use ? (Wind ows)  
If yo u sto p p rinting o r the p rinte r sto p s p rinting b e c a use o f a n e rro r, the p rint q ue ue e nte rs a Pa use  
sta tus. Yo u c a nno t p rint in this sta tus.  
Do ub le -c lic k the p rinte r ic o n in the De vic e s a nd Printe rs, Printe r, o r Printe rs a nd Fa xe s fo ld e r; if  
p rinting is p a use d , o p e n the Printe r m e nu a nd c le a r the Pa use c he c k b o x.  
o
Doe s the c urre nt p rinte r sta tus show Printing Pa use d (Ma c OS X)?  
Op e n the sta tus d ia lo g fo r yo ur p rinte r a nd c he c k whe the r p rinting is p a use d .  
1. Se le c t Syste m Pre fe re nc e s > Print & Sc a n (o r Print & Fa x) > Op e n Print Que ue fro m the Ap p le  
m e nu.  
2. Do ub le -c lic k the ic o n fo r a ny p rinte r tha t is Pa use d .  
3. C lic k Re sum e Printe r.  
Your p rob le m is not liste d he re .  
o
De c id e whe the r the troub le is c a use d b y the p rinte r d rive r or the a p p lic a tion. (Wind ows)  
Pe rfo rm a te st p rint fro m the p rinte r d rive r so tha t yo u c a n c he c k tha t the c o nne c tio n b e twe e n  
the p rinte r a nd c o m p ute r is c o rre c t a nd the p rinte r d rive r se tting s a re c o rre c t.  
1. Ma ke sure tha t the p rinte r is turne d o n a nd in re a d y sta tus, a nd lo a d A4 o r la rg e r p a p e r.  
2. Op e n the De vic e s a nd Printe rs, Printe r, o r Printe rs a nd Fa xe s fo ld e r.  
3. Rig ht-c lic k the ta rg e t p rinte r ic o n, a nd se le c t Prop e rtie s.  
4. In the Pro p e rtie s d ia lo g , se le c t the Ge ne ra l ta b a nd c lic k Print Te st Pa g e .  
Afte r a while the p rinte r sta rts to p rint a te st p a g e .  
O
If the te st p a g e is p rinte d c o rre c tly, the c o nne c tio n b e twe e n the p rinte r a nd c o m p ute r is  
c o rre c t. G o to the ne xt se c tio n.  
O
If the te st p a g e is no t p rinte d c o rre c tly, c he c k the ite m s a b o ve a g a in.  
Se e Yo u c a nno t p rint (b e c a use the p rinte r d o e s no t wo rk)” o n p a g e 208.  
The "Drive r Ve rsio n" sho wn o n the te st p a g e is the ve rsio n num b e r o f the Wind o ws inte rna l d rive r.  
This d iffe rs fro m the Ep so n p rinte r d rive r ve rsio n tha t yo u insta lle d .  
Problem Solver 210  
The p rinte r sound s like it is p rinting , b ut nothing p rints  
The p rint he a d m ove s, b ut nothing p rints.  
o
Confirm the p rinte r op e ra tion  
Print a no zzle c he c k p a tte rn. Be c a use a no zzle c he c k p a tte rn c a n b e p rinte d witho ut c o nne c ting  
to a c o m p ute r, yo u c a n c he c k the o p e ra tio ns a nd p rint sta tus fo r the p rinte r. Se e Che c king fo r  
c lo g g e d no zzle s” o n p a g e 184.  
C he c k the ne xt se c tio n if the no zzle c he c k p a tte rn is no t p rinte d c o rre c tly.  
o
Is the m e ssa g e Motor Se lf Ad justm e nt d isp la ye d on the c ontrol p a ne l’s sc re e n?  
The p rinte r a d justs the inte rna l m o to r. Wa it fo r a while witho ut turning o ff the p rinte r.  
The nozzle c he c k p a tte rn is not p rinte d c orre c tly.  
o
Pe rform he a d c le a ning .  
The no zzle s m a y b e c lo g g e d . Print a no zzle c he c k p a tte rn a g a in a fte r p e rfo rm ing he a d c le a ning .  
Se e C le a ning the p rint he a d ” o n p a g e 187.  
o
Ha s the p rinte r b e e n le ft unuse d for a long tim e ?  
If the p rinte r ha s no t b e e n use d fo r a lo ng tim e , the no zzle s m a y ha ve d rie d up a nd ha ve b e e n  
c lo g g e d .  
The p rints a re not wha t you e xp e c te d  
Print q ua lity is p oor, une ve n, too lig ht, or too d a rk.  
o
Are the p rint he a d nozzle s c log g e d ?  
If the no zzle s a re c lo g g e d , sp e c ific no zzle s d o no t fire ink a nd the p rint q ua lity d e c line s. Print a  
no zzle c he c k p a tte rn.  
Se e Che c king fo r c lo g g e d no zzle s” o n p a g e 184.  
o
Wa s He a d Alig nm e nt p e rform e d ?  
With b id ire c tio na l p rinting , the p rint he a d p rints while m o ving le ft a nd rig ht. If the p rint he a d is  
m isa lig ne d , rule d line s m a y b e m isa lig ne d a c c o rd ing ly. If ve rtic a l rule d line s a re m isa lig ne d with  
b id ire c tio na l p rinting , p e rfo rm He a d Alig nm e nt.  
Se e Minim izing Print Misa lig nm e nts (He a d Alig nm e nt)” o n p a g e 189.  
o
Are you using a g e nuine Ep son ink c a rtrid g e ?  
This p rinte r is d e ve lo p e d fo r use with Ep so n ink c a rtrid g e s. If yo u use no n-Ep so n ink c a rtrid g e s, the  
p rints m a y sm e a r, o r the c o lo r o f the p rinte d im a g e m a y b e c ha ng e d b e c a use the re m a ining ink  
le ve l is no t c o rre c tly d e te c te d . Be sure to use the c o rre c t ink c a rtrid g e .  
Problem Solver 211  
o
o
Are you using a n old ink c a rtrid g e ?  
The p rint q ua lity d e c line s whe n a n o ld ink c a rtrid g e is use d . Re p la c e the o ld ink c a rtrid g e with a  
ne w o ne . We re c o m m e nd using a ll the ink in the c a rtrid g e b e fo re the e xp ira tio n d a te p rinte d o n  
the p a c ka g e (within a ye a r o f insta lla tio n).  
Ha ve the ink c a rtrid g e s b e e n sha ke n?  
The ink c a rtrid g e s fo r this p rinte r c o nta in p ig m e nt inks. Sha ke the c a rtrid g e s tho ro ug hly b e fo re  
insta lling the m in the p rinte r.  
We a lso re c o m m e nd tha t yo u re m o ve a nd sha ke the insta lle d ink c a rtrid g e s o nc e e ve ry thre e  
m o nths to e nsure p rint q ua lity.  
Se e Re p la c ing Ink C a rtrid g e s” o n p a g e 193.  
o
Are the Me d ia Typ e se tting s c orre c t?  
Print q ua lity is a ffe c te d if the Me d ia Typ e yo u ha ve se le c te d in the Printe r Se tting s sc re e n  
(Wind o ws) o r Print sc re e n (Ma c OS X) in the p rinte r d rive r d o e s no t m a tc h with the p a p e r tha t is  
lo a d e d in the p rinte r. Be sure to m a tc h the m e d ia typ e se tting with the p a p e r tha t is lo a d e d in the  
p rinte r.  
o
o
Did you se le c t a low q ua lity m od e (suc h a s Sp e e d ) a s the Print Qua lity?  
If the o p tio ns se le c te d fo r Print Qua lity > Ad va nc e d Se tting s p la c e p rio rity o n sp e e d , q ua lity will b e  
sa c rific e d fo r p rint sp e e d , p o te ntia lly c a using p rint q ua lity to d e c line . To im p ro ve p rint q ua lity,  
se le c t Re solution o p tio ns tha t g ive p rio rity to q ua lity.  
Is c olor m a na g e m e nt e na b le d ?  
Ena b le c o lo r m a na g e m e nt.  
Se e Co lo r Ma na g e m e nt Printing ” o n p a g e 135.  
o
o
o
Ha ve you c om p a re d the p rinting re sult with the im a g e on the d isp la y m onitor?  
Sinc e m o nito rs a nd p rinte rs p ro d uc e c o lo rs d iffe re ntly, p rinte d c o lo rs will no t a lwa ys m a tc h  
o n-sc re e n c o lo rs p e rfe c tly.  
Did you op e n the p rinte r c ove r while p rinting ?  
If the p rinte r c o ve r is o p e ne d while p rinting , the p rint he a d sto p s sud d e nly c a using une ve nne ss in  
the c o lo r. Do no t o p e n the p rinte r c o ve r while p rinting .  
Is Ink Low d isp la ye d in the c ontrol p a ne l?  
The p rint q ua lity m a y d e c line whe n the ink is lo w. We re c o m m e nd re p la c ing the ink c a rtrid g e with  
a ne w o ne . If the re is a d iffe re nc e in c o lo r a fte r re p la c ing the ink c a rtrid g e , try p e rfo rm ing he a d  
c le a ning a fe w tim e s.  
Problem Solver 212  
The c olor is not e xa c tly the sa m e a s a nothe r p rinte r.  
o
Colors va ry d e p e nd ing on the p rinte r typ e d ue to e a c h p rinte r’s c ha ra c te ristic s.  
Be c a use inks, p rinte r d rive rs, a nd p rinte r p ro file s a re d e ve lo p e d fo r e a c h p rinte r m o d e l, the c o lo rs  
p rinte d b y d iffe re nt p rinte r m o d e ls a re no t e xa c tly the sa m e .  
Yo u c a n a c hie ve sim ila r c o lo rs with the sa m e c o lo r a d justm e nt m e tho d o r the sa m e g a m m a  
se tting b y using the p rinte r d rive r.  
Se e Co lo r Ma na g e m e nt Printing ” o n p a g e 135.  
To m a tc h the c o lo r p re c ise ly, use the c o lo r m e a sure m e nt d e vic e to p e rfo rm c o lo r m a na g e m e nt.  
The p rint is not p ositione d p rop e rly on the p a p e r.  
o
Ha ve you sp e c ifie d the p rint a re a ?  
C he c k the p rint a re a in the se tting s o f the a p p lic a tio n a nd the p rinte r.  
o
Is the c orre c t op tion se le c te d for Pa p e r Size ?  
If the o p tio n se le c te d fo r Pa p e r Size in the p rinte r d rive r d o e s no t m a tc h the p a p e r lo a d e d in the  
p rinte r, the p rint m a y no t b e in the c o rre c t p o sitio n o r so m e o f the d a ta m a y b e p rinte d o ff the  
p a p e r. In this c a se , c he c k the p rint se tting s.  
o
o
o
Is the p a p e r ske we d ?  
If Off is se le c te d fo r Me d ia Ske w Che c k in the Se tup m e nu, p rinting will c o ntinue e ve n if the p a p e r  
is ske we d , re sulting in d a ta b e ing p rinte d o ff the p a p e r. Se le c t On fo r Me d ia Ske w Che c k in the  
Se tup m e nu.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
Doe s the p rint d a ta fit within the p a p e r wid th?  
Altho ug h und e r no rm a l c irc um sta nc e s p rinting sto p s if the p rint im a g e is wid e r tha n the p a p e r,  
the p rinte r m a y p rint o utsid e the b o und s o f the p a p e r whe n Off is se le c te d fo r Pa p e r Size Che c k  
in the Se tup m e nu. Se le c t On fo r Pa p e r Size Che c k in the Se tup m e nu.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
Is the roll p a p e r m a rg in se t to 15 m m or 35 m m ?  
If the va lue se le c te d fo r Roll Pa p e r Ma rg in in the Se tup m e nu is wid e r tha n the m a rg ins se le c te d  
in the a p p lic a tio n, p rio rity will b e g ive n to the va lue se le c te d fo r Roll Pa p e r Ma rg in. Fo r e xa m p le ,  
if 15 m m is se le c te d fo r the le ft a nd rig ht m a rg ins in the p rinte r Se tup m e nu a nd the d o c um e nt fills  
the p a g e , the 15 m m a t the le ft a nd rig ht sid e s o f the p a g e will no t b e p rinte d .  
Se e Printa b le Are a ” o n p a g e 81.  
Problem Solver 213  
Ve rtic a l rule d line s a re m isa lig ne d .  
o
Is the p rint he a d m isa lig ne d ? (in b id ire c tiona l p rinting )  
With b id ire c tio na l p rinting , the p rint he a d p rints while m o ving le ft a nd rig ht. If the p rint he a d is  
m isa lig ne d , rule d line s m a y b e m isa lig ne d a c c o rd ing ly. If ve rtic a l rule d line s a re m isa lig ne d with  
b id ire c tio na l p rinting , p e rfo rm He a d Alig nm e nt.  
Se e Minim izing Print Misa lig nm e nts (He a d Alig nm e nt)” o n p a g e 189.  
The p rinte d surfa c e is sc uffe d or soile d .  
o
Is the p a p e r too thic k or too thin?  
C he c k tha t the p a p e r sp e c ific a tio ns a re c o m p a tib le with this p rinte r. Fo r info rm a tio n a b o ut the  
m e d ia typ e s a nd a p p ro p ria te se tting s fo r p rinting o n p a p e r fro m o the r m a nufa c ture rs o r whe n  
using RIP so ftwa re , se e the d o c um e nta tio n sup p lie d with the p a p e r, o r c o nta c t the d e a le r o f the  
p a p e r o r the m a nufa c ture r o f the RIP.  
o
o
Is the p a p e r c re a se d or fold e d ?  
Do no t use o ld p a p e r o r p a p e r with fo ld s in it. Alwa ys use ne w p a p e r.  
Is the p a p e r wa vy or sla c k?  
Cut she e ts b e c o m e wa vy o r sla c k d ue to c ha ng e s in te m p e ra ture o r hum id ity whic h m a y re sult in  
the p rinte r b e ing una b le to re c o g nize the p a p e r size c o rre c tly. Fla tte n the p a p e r b e fo re lo a d ing  
it in the p rinte r, o r use ne w p a p e r.  
o
Is the p rint he a d sc uffing the p rinte d surfa c e ?  
If the surfa c e o f the p a p e r is sc uffe d , se le c t a Pla te n Ga p o p tio n b e twe e n Wid e a nd Wid e r in the  
Pa p e r m e nu.  
Se e Pa p e r m e nu” o n p a g e 171.  
o
o
Is the p rint he a d sc uffing the e d g e of the p a p e r?  
Se le c t Top 35m m / Bottom 15m m fo r the Roll Pa p e r Ma rg in o p tio n in the Se tup m e nu.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
Wid e n the b ottom m a rg in  
De p e nd ing o n the p a p e r usa g e , sto ra g e c o nd itio ns, a nd the c o nte nt o f the p rint d a ta , the  
b o tto m e d g e m a y b e sc uffe d whe n p rinting . In this situa tio n it is b e st to c re a te yo ur d a ta with a  
wid e r b o tto m m a rg in.  
o
Doe s the inte rior of the p rinte r ne e d c le a ning ?  
The ro lle rs m a y ne e d c le a ning . C le a n the ro lle rs b y fe e d ing a nd e je c ting p a p e r.  
Se e Cle a ning the insid e ” o n p a g e 201.  
Problem Solver 214  
The p a p e r is c re a se d .  
o
Are you using the p rinte r a t norm a l room te m p e ra ture ?  
Ep so n sp e c ia l m e d ia sho uld b e use d a t no rm a l ro o m te m p e ra ture (te m p e ra ture : 59 to 77°F [15 to  
25°C ], hum id ity: 40 to 60%). Fo r info rm a tio n a b o ut p a p e r suc h a s thin p a p e r fro m o the r  
m a nufa c ture rs tha t re q uire s sp e c ia l ha nd ling , se e the d o c um e nta tio n sup p lie d with the p a p e r.  
o
Whe n using non-Ep son sp e c ia l m e d ia , ha ve you m a d e the p a p e r c onfig ura tion?  
Whe n using no n-Ep so n sp e c ia l m e d ia , c o nfig ure the p a p e r c ha ra c te ristic s (c usto m p a p e r)  
b e fo re p rinting .  
Se e Be fo re p rinting o n no n-Ep so n m e d ia ” o n p a g e 230.  
The re ve rse sid e of the p rinte d p a p e r is soile d .  
o
Se le c t On for Pa p e r Size Che c k in the m e nus.  
Altho ug h p rinting no rm a lly sto p s if the p rint im a g e is wid e r tha n the p a p e r, whe n Off is se le c te d  
fo r Pa p e r Size Che c k in the Se tup m e nu, the p rinte r m a y p rint o utsid e the b o und s o f the p a p e r,  
g e tting ink o n the insid e o f the p rinte r in the p ro c e ss. This c a n b e p re ve nte d b y se le c ting On fo r  
Pa p e r Size Che c k in the Se tup m e nu.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
o
Is ink d ry on the p rinte d surfa c e ?  
De p e nd ing o n the p rinting d e nsity a nd m e d ia typ e , the ink m a y ta ke a while to d ry. Do no t sta c k  
the p a p e r until the p rinte d surfa c e is d ry.  
Also , if yo u se t the Drying Tim e p e r Pa g e in Pa p e r Config ura tion fro m the p rinte r d rive r, yo u c a n  
sto p the o p e ra tio n a fte r p rinting (e je c ting a nd c utting p a p e r) a nd wa it until the ink is d ry. Se e the  
p rinte r d rive r he lp fo r m o re d e ta ils o n the Pa p e r Co nfig ura tio n d ia lo g .  
Se e Cle a ning the insid e ” o n p a g e 201.  
Too m uc h ink is fire d .  
o
Are the Me d ia Typ e se tting s c orre c t?  
Ma ke sure tha t the p rinte r d rive r’s Me d ia Typ e se tting s m a tc h the p a p e r tha t yo u a re using . The  
a m o unt o f ink to b e fire d is c o ntro lle d a c c o rd ing to the m e d ia typ e . If the se tting s d o no t m a tc h  
the p a p e r lo a d e d , to o m uc h ink m a y b e fire d .  
o
Is the Color De nsity se tting c orre c t?  
Lo we r the d e nsity o f the ink in the Pa p e r Config ura tion d ia lo g fro m the p rinte r d rive r. The p rinte r  
m a y b e firing to o m uc h ink fo r so m e p a p e r. Se e the p rinte r d rive r he lp fo r m o re d e ta ils o n the  
Pa p e r Co nfig ura tio n d ia lo g .  
Problem Solver 215  
o
Are you p rinting on tra c ing p a p e r?  
If to o m uc h ink is use d whe n p rinting in B&W o n tra c ing p a p e r, yo u m a y g e t b e tte r re sults b y  
c ho o sing a lo we r p rint d e nsity in the Pa p e r Config ura tion d ia lo g o r b y se le c ting Tra c ing Pa p e r  
<Low Duty> fo r Me d ia Typ e .  
Ma rg ins a p p e a r in b ord e rle ss p rinting .  
o
Are the se tting s for the p rint d a ta in the a p p lic a tion c orre c t?  
Ma ke sure tha t the p a p e r se tting s in the a p p lic a tio n a re c o rre c t a s we ll a s in the p rinte r d rive r.  
Se e Bo rd e rle ss Printing ” o n p a g e 106.  
o
o
Are the p a p e r se tting s c orre c t?  
Ma ke sure tha t the p a p e r se tting s o f the p rinte r m a tc h the p a p e r tha t yo u a re using .  
Ha ve you c ha ng e d the a m ount of e nla rg e m e nt?  
Ad just the a m o unt o f e nla rg e m e nt fo r b o rd e rle ss p rinting . Ma rg ins m a y a p p e a r if yo u se t the  
a m o unt o f e nla rg e m e nt to Min.  
Se e Bo rd e rle ss Printing ” o n p a g e 106.  
o
o
o
Is the p a p e r store d c orre c tly?  
The p a p e r m a y e xp a nd o r c o ntra c t if it is no t sto re d c o rre c tly so tha t m a rg ins a p p e a r e ve n whe n  
b o rd e rle ss is se t. Se e the d o c um e nta tio n sup p lie d with the p a p e r fo r m o re info rm a tio n o n the  
sto ra g e m e tho d .  
Are you using p a p e r tha t sup p orts b ord e rle ss p rinting ?  
Pa p e r tha t d o e s no t sup p o rt b o rd e rle ss p rinting m a y e xp a nd o r c o ntra c t while p rinting so tha t  
m a rg ins a p p e a r e ve n whe n b o rd e rle ss is se t. We re c o m m e nd using p a p e r tha t is d e sig ne d to  
sup p o rt b o rd e rle ss p rinting .  
Try a d justing the c utte r.  
Whe n the re a re m a rg ins o n the to p a nd b o tto m o f the ro ll p a p e r while p e rfo rm ing b o rd e rle ss  
p rinting , try p e rfo rm ing Ad just Cut Position. It m a y re d uc e the m a rg ins.  
Se e Ma inte na nc e m e nu” o n p a g e 174.  
Problem Solver 216  
Fe e d ing or e je c ting p rob le m s  
Una b le to fe e d or e je c t p a p e r.  
o
Is the p a p e r loa d e d in the c orre c t p osition?  
Se e the fo llo wing fo r the c o rre c t p a p e r lo a d ing p o sitio ns.  
Se e Lo a d ing Ro ll Pa p e r” o n p a g e 32, “Lo a d ing a nd Re m o ving Cut She e ts” o n p a g e 43, o r  
Lo a d ing a nd Re m o ving Po ste r Bo a rd ” o n p a g e 47.  
If the p a p e r is lo a d e d c o rre c tly, c he c k the c o nd itio n o f the p a p e r tha t yo u a re using .  
o
Is the p a p e r loa d e d in the c orre c t d ire c tion?  
Lo a d c ut she e ts ve rtic a lly. If the y a re no t lo a d e d in the c o rre c t d ire c tio n, the p a p e r m a y no t b e  
re c o g nize d a nd a n e rro r m a y o c c ur.  
Se e Lo a d ing a nd Re m o ving C ut She e ts” o n p a g e 43.  
o
o
Is the p a p e r c re a se d or fold e d ?  
Do no t use o ld p a p e r o r p a p e r with fo ld s in it. Alwa ys use ne w p a p e r.  
Is the p a p e r d a m p ?  
Do no t use p a p e r tha t is d a m p . Also , Ep so n sp e c ia l m e d ia sho uld b e le ft in the b a g until yo u  
inte nd to use it. If it is le ft o ut fo r a lo ng tim e , the p a p e r c urls up a nd g e ts d a m p so tha t it d o e s no t  
fe e d p ro p e rly.  
o
o
Is the p a p e r wa vy or sla c k?  
Cut she e ts b e c o m e wa vy o r sla c k d ue to c ha ng e s in te m p e ra ture o r hum id ity whic h m a y re sult in  
the p rinte r b e ing una b le to re c o g nize the p a p e r size c o rre c tly. Fla tte n the p a p e r b e fo re lo a d ing  
it in the p rinte r, o r use ne w p a p e r.  
Is the p a p e r too thic k or too thin?  
C he c k tha t the p a p e r sp e c ific a tio ns a re c o m p a tib le with this p rinte r. Fo r info rm a tio n a b o ut the  
m e d ia typ e s a nd a p p ro p ria te se tting s fo r p rinting o n p a p e r fro m o the r m a nufa c ture rs o r whe n  
using RIP so ftwa re , se e the d o c um e nta tio n sup p lie d with the p a p e r, o r c o nta c t the d e a le r o f the  
p a p e r o r the m a nufa c ture r o f the RIP.  
o
o
Are you using the p rinte r a t norm a l room te m p e ra ture ?  
Ep so n sp e c ia l m e d ia sho uld b e use d a t no rm a l ro o m te m p e ra ture (te m p e ra ture : 59 to 77°F [15 to  
25°C ], hum id ity: 40 to 60%).  
Is p a p e r ja m m e d in the p rinte r?  
Op e n the p rinte r c o ve r o f the p rinte r a nd c he c k tha t the re a re no p a p e r ja m s o r fo re ig n o b je c ts  
in the p rinte r. If p a p e r is ja m m e d , se e "Pa p e r ja m s" b e lo w a nd c le a r the ja m m e d p a p e r.  
Problem Solver 217  
o
Is the p a p e r suc tion too strong ?  
If yo u c o ntinue to ha ve p ro b le m s with e je c te d p a p e r, try lo we ring the Pa p e r Suc tio n (the a m o unt  
o f suc tio n use d to ke e p the p a p e r o n the p a p e r fe e d p a th). Se e Pa p e r m e nu” o n p a g e 171.  
Pa p e r d oe s not c olle c t in the p a p e r b a ske t or is c re a se d or fold e d whe n  
the p a p e r b a ske t is use d .  
o
Doe s the p rint job re q uire a lot of ink, or is the hum id ity of the workp la c e hig h?  
De p e nd ing o n the jo b a nd the wo rk e nviro nm e nt, p a p e r m a y no t c o lle c t in the p a p e r b a ske t.  
Ta ke the fo llo wing m e a sure s a s a p p ro p ria te .  
O
O
O
Pa p e r d o e s no t c o lle c t in the p a p e r b a ske t: Use yo ur ha nd s to lig htly p re ss the p a p e r into the  
p a p e r b a ske t a s it is e je c te d fro m the p rinte r.  
The p a p e r fo ld s a fte r it ha s b e e n c ut a uto m a tic a lly: Se le c t m a nua l c utting a nd ta ke the  
p a p e r in b o th ha nd s a fte r it is c ut.  
The p a p e r c re a se s a nd d o e s no t c o lle c t we ll in the p a p e r b a ske t: Re sum e p rinting a fte r  
c lo sing the p a p e r b a ske t. Be fo re the p a p e r e je c te d fro m the p rinte r to uc he s the flo o r, ta ke it  
in b o th ha nd s c lo se to the p a p e r e je c t g uid e s a nd c o ntinue to lig htly sup p o rt it until p rinting is  
c o m p le te .  
Roll p a p e r ja m  
To remove jammed paper, follow the steps below:  
1. Turn off the printer.  
2. Turn the printer on.  
After a pause, the message Open printer cover and remove jammed Paper will  
appear in the display.  
3. Open the printer cover and move the print head away from the jam.  
4. Pull the paper over any torn or crinkled areas and cut it using scissors or a third-party  
cutter.  
Problem Solver 218  
5. Remove the paper via the paper feed slot or the eject slot.  
6. After removing the paper, close the printer cover and press the Z button.  
Reload the paper and resume printing.  
See “Loading Roll Paper” on page 32.  
Cut she e ts ja m  
To remove jammed paper, follow the steps below:  
1. Turn off the printer.  
2. Turn the printer on.  
After a pause, the message Open printer cover and remove jammed Paper will  
appear in the display.  
3. Open the printer cover and move the print head away from the jam.  
Problem Solver 219  
4. Remove the jammed paper.  
5. After removing the paper, close the printer cover and press the Z button.  
Reload the paper and resume printing.  
See “Loading and Removing Cut Sheets” on page 43.  
Othe rs  
The c ontrol p a ne l d isp la y ke e p s turning off.  
o
Is the p rinte r in sle e p m od e ?  
No rm a l o p e ra tio n c a n b e re sto re d b y p re ssing a ny o f the b utto ns in the c o ntro l p a ne l to  
re a c tiva te the d isp la y a nd the n p e rfo rm ing a ha rd wa re o p e ra tio n suc h a s o p e ning the p rinte r  
c o ve r o r se nd ing a jo b to the p rinte r. The d e la y b e fo re the p rinte r e nte rs sle e p m o d e c a n b e  
se le c te d in the Se tup m e nu.  
Se e Se tup m e nu” o n p a g e 175.  
Color ink runs out q uic kly e ve n whe n p rinting in the Bla c k m od e or whe n  
p rinting b la c k d a ta .  
o
Color ink is c onsum e d d uring the he a d c le a ning p roc e ss.  
If a ll no zzle s a re se le c te d whe n yo u p e rfo rm He a d Cle a ning o r Powe r Cle a ning , inks o f a ll c o lo rs  
will b e use d . (This is true e ve n if yo u a re c urre ntly p rinting in b la c k-a nd -white .)  
Se e C le a ning the p rint he a d ” o n p a g e 187.  
The p a p e r is not c ut c le a nly.  
o
Re p la c e the c utte r.  
If the p a p e r is no t c ut c le a nly, re p la c e the c utte r.  
Se e Re p la c ing the Cutte r” o n p a g e 197.  
Problem Solver 220  
A lig ht is visib le insid e the p rinte r.  
o
This is not a fa ilure .  
The lig ht is a lig ht insid e the p rinte r.  
The a d m inistra tor p a ssword ha s b e e n lost.  
o
Sho uld yo u fo rg e t the a d m inistra to r p a sswo rd , c o nta c t yo ur d e a le r o r Ep so n Sup p o rt.  
He a d c le a ning sta rts whe n the p rinte r is turne d on.  
o
Whe n turne d o n a fte r a n e xte nd e d p e rio d o f d isuse , the p rinte r m a y a uto m a tic a lly p e rfo rm he a d  
c le a ning to e nsure p rint q ua lity.  
He a d c le a ning will e nd a fte r a b o ut 10 to 15 m inute s.  
Problem Solver 221  
Ap p e nd ix A  
Op tions a nd Inform a tion  
Op tions a nd Consum a b le Prod uc ts  
The following options and consumable products are available for use with your printer. (As  
of May, 2012)  
For the latest information, see the Epson website.  
Ink Cartridges  
Sure Color T7000/ T7070/ T5000/ T5070/ T3000/ T3070  
Ca p a c ity  
350 m l  
Exp la na tion  
Color  
700 m l  
T6941  
110 m l  
T6921  
Pho to Ba lc k  
C ya n  
T6931  
Ep so n re c o m m e nd s the use o f g e nuine  
Ep so n ink c a rtrid g e s. Ep so n c a nno t  
g ua ra nte e the q ua lity o r re lia b ility o f  
no n-g e nuine ink. The use o f  
no n-g e nuine ink m a y c a use d a m a g e  
tha t is no t c o ve re d b y Ep so ns  
T6942  
T6943  
T6944  
T6945  
T6932  
T6933  
T6934  
T6935  
T6922  
T6923  
T6924  
T6925  
Ma g e nta  
Ye llo w  
Ma tte Bla c k  
wa rra ntie s, a nd und e r c e rta in  
c irc um sta nc e s, m a y c a use e rra tic  
p rinte r b e ha vio r. Info rm a tio n a b o ut  
no n-g e nuine ink le ve ls m a y no t b e  
d isp la ye d , a nd use o f no n-g e nuine ink  
is re c o rd e d fo r p o ssib le use in se rvic e  
sup p o rt. Se e Re p la c ing Ink Ca rtrid g e s”  
o n p a g e 193.  
Others  
Prod uc t na m e  
Prod uc t num b e r  
Exp la na tion  
Ep so n Sp e c ia l Me d ia Se e Ep so n Sp e c ia l Me d ia Ta b le ” o n p a g e 224.  
Ma inte na nc e Bo x  
T6193  
Re p la c e m e nt Ma inte na nc e Bo x fo r Ma inte na nc e Bo x  
whic h is a t the e nd o f its se rvic e life .  
Se e Re p la c ing Ma inte na nc e Bo xe s” o n p a g e 195.  
Auto Cutte r Sp a re  
Bla d e  
S902006  
Se e the fo llo wing se c tio n to re p la c e the c utte r.  
Se e Re p la c ing the Cutte r” o n p a g e 197.  
Ro ll Ad a p te r  
C12C811381  
C12C890121  
This is the sa m e a s the ro ll a d a p te r sup p lie d with the  
p rinte r.  
Ro ll Pa p e r Be lt  
This ho ld e r ke e p s ro ll p a p e r fro m unro lling a fte r it is  
re m o ve d fro m the p rinte r.  
Se e Re m o ving the ro ll p a p e r” o n p a g e 41.  
Ha rd Disk Unit  
C12C843911  
Se e Using the O p tio na l Ha rd Disk Unit” o n p a g e 87.  
Options and Information 222  
Prod uc t na m e  
Prod uc t num b e r  
Exp la na tion  
Auto Ta ke -up Re e l  
Unit  
C12C815321  
Fo r the Sure C o lo r T7000. It c a nno t b e use d with the  
Sure Co lo r T5000 o r Sure C o lo r T3000.  
Be sure to use with the a uto ta ke -up re e l unit a tta c hm e nt.  
The a uto ta ke -up re e l unit c a nno t b e c o nne c te d to the  
p rinte r witho ut the a tta c hm e nt.  
Se e the d o c um e nta tio n sup p lie d with the a uto ta ke -up  
re e l unit fo r info rm a tio n o n insta lla tio n.  
Se e Using the Auto Ta ke -up Re e l Unit (Sure Co lo r T7000  
Only)” o n p a g e 61.  
Atta c hm e nt fo r Auto C12C815411  
Ta ke -up Re e l Unit  
Fo r the Sure C o lo r T7000. It c a nno t b e use d with the  
Sure Co lo r T5000 o r Sure C o lo r T3000. This ite m is re q uire d  
whe n insta lling the a uto ta ke -up re e l unit.  
Sta nd (24”)  
C12C844131  
Fo r the Sure C o lo r T7000, Sure Co lo r T5000, a nd Sure Co lo r  
T3000. Se e the Se tup G uid e fo r a sse m b ly instruc tio ns.  
Sup p orte d Me d ia  
We recommend you use the following Epson special media for high-quality printing results.  
Note:  
For information about the media types and appropriate settings for printing on paper other  
than Epson special media or when using raster image processing (RIP) software, see the  
documentation supplied with the paper, or contact the dealer of the paper or the  
manufacturer of the RIP.  
Item descriptions  
O Name: Describes the media name.  
O Size: Describes the size for cut sheet media or the width for roll paper.  
O Thickness: Describes the thickness of the media.  
O Borderless: Describes whether borderless printing is available.  
O Take-up: Describes available taking up direction when using optional Auto Take-up  
Reel Unit: “F” means Forward and “B” means Backward.  
O Enlarged: Describes availability of Enlarged Copy when connecting a scanner to the  
printer.  
O Head Alignment: Describes availability of auto Head Alignment with option of  
Auto (Bi-D) or Auto (Uni-D).  
Options and Information 223  
O ICC Profile: Describes the ICC profile for the media. The file name of the profile is used  
as the profile name in the printer driver or the application.  
Ep son Sp e c ia l Me d ia Ta b le  
Roll p a p e r  
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250), 3-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
F
B
406 m m / 16"  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSO N  
SC -T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium G lo ssy  
Pho to Pa p e r 250.ic c  
0.27 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250), 3-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
Alig nm e nt  
F
B
406 m m / 16"  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSO N  
SC -T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium Se m ig lo ss  
Pho to Pa p e r 250.ic c  
0.27 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
Options and Information 224  
Premium Luster Photo Paper (260), 3-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
F
B
254 m m / 10"  
300 m m / 11.8"  
406 m m / 16"  
508 m m / 20"  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium Luste r  
Pho to Pa p e r 260.ic c  
0.27 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260), 3-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
Alig nm e nt  
F
B
406 m m / 16"  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium  
Se m im a tte Pho to Pa p e r  
260.ic c  
0.27 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
Photo Paper Gloss (250), 3-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
F
B
432 m m / 17"  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pho to Pa p e r G lo ss  
250.ic c  
0.25 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
Options and Information 225  
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170), 2-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
F
B
420 m m / (A2)  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium G lo ssy  
Pho to Pa p e r 170.ic c  
0.18 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170), 2-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
Alig nm e nt  
F
B
420 m m / (A2)  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium Se m ig lo ss  
Pho to Pa p e r 170.ic c  
0.18 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
Enhanced Synthetic Paper, 2-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
F
B
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
*2  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Enha nc e d  
Synthe tic Pa p e r.ic c  
*1  
1118 m m / 44" 0.13 m m  
*1 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
*2 Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper expanding or  
contracting.  
Enhanced Adhesive Synthetic Paper, 2-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
F
B
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Enha nc e d  
Ad he sive Synthe tic  
Pa p e r.ic c  
*1  
1118 m m / 44"  
*2  
0.18 m m  
Options and Information 226  
*1 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
*2 Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper expanding or  
contracting.  
Doubleweight Matte Paper, 2-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
F
B
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
*3  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Do ub le we ig ht  
Ma tte Pa p e r.ic c  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
0.21 m m  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
*3 Use the tensioner supplied with the auto take-up reel unit.  
Enhanced Matte Paper, 3-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
Alig nm e nt  
F
B
432 m m / 17"  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Enha nc e d a nd  
Arc hiva l Ma tte Pa p e r.ic c  
*3  
0.25 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
*3 Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper expanding or  
contracting.  
Singleweight Matte Paper, 2-inch core  
Ta ke -up  
Enla rg e d He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
ICC Profile  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss  
F
B
432 m m / 17"  
610 m m / 24"  
EPSON  
SC-T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Sing le we ig ht  
Ma tte Pa p e r.ic c  
*3  
0.15 m m  
*1  
914 m m / 36"  
*2  
1118 m m / 44"  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 SureColor T3000/SureColor T5000 not supported  
*3 Use the tensioner supplied with the auto take-up reel unit.  
Options and Information 227  
Cut she e t  
Borderless printing with cut sheets can only be performed with no left and right margins.  
He a d  
Alig nm e nt  
Na m e  
Size  
Thic kne ss Bord e rle ss Enla rg e d  
ICC Profile  
Pre m ium G lo ssy  
Pho to Pa p e r  
EPSO N  
Sup e rA3/ B  
A2  
*2  
SC -T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium G lo ssy  
Pho to Pa p e r.ic c  
0.27 m m  
0.27 m m  
0.27 m m  
0.26 m m  
0.12 m m  
*2  
US-C  
Pre m ium  
Se m ig lo ss Pho to  
Pa p e r  
*2  
EPSO N  
Sup e rA3/ B  
A2  
SC -T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium  
Se m ig lo ss Pho to  
Pa p e r.ic c  
*2  
US-C  
Pre m ium Luste r  
Pho to Pa p e r  
*2  
EPSO N  
Sup e r B  
A2  
SC -T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pre m ium Luste r  
Pho to Pa p e r.ic c  
*2  
US-C  
Arc hiva l Ma tte  
Pa p e r/ Enha nc e d  
Ma tte Pa p e r  
*2  
EPSO N  
Sup e rA3/ B  
A2  
SC -T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Enha nc e d a nd  
Arc hiva l Ma tte  
Pa p e r.ic c  
*2  
US-C  
Pho to Q ua lity  
Inkje t Pa p e r  
*2  
EPSO N  
Sup e rA3/ B  
A2  
SC -T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Pho to Q ua lity  
Ink Je t Pa p e r.ic c  
*2  
US-C  
Enha nc e d Ma tte 610 × 762  
EPSO N  
Po ste rb o a rd  
m m  
(24" × 30")  
SC -T3000_5000_7000_  
Se rie s Enha nc e d  
Ma tte Po ste r  
Bo a rd .ic c  
*1  
1.30 m m  
762 × 1016  
m m  
(30" × 40")  
*1  
*1 SureColor T3000 not supported  
*2 Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper expanding or  
contracting.  
Options and Information 228  
Usa b le Com m e rc ia lly Ava ila b le Pa p e r Size  
This printer supports the following paper specifications for non-Epson media.  
Important:  
O Do not use paper that is wrinkled, scuffed, torn, or dirty.  
O Although plain paper and recycled paper manufactured by other companies can be loaded  
and fed in the printer as long as they meet the following specifications, Epson cannot  
guarantee the print quality.  
O Although other paper types manufactured by other companies can be loaded in the printer as  
long as they meet the following specifications, Epson cannot guarantee the paper feeding  
and print quality.  
Roll p a p e r  
Me d ia typ e s  
Pla in p a p e r a nd re c yc le d p a p e r  
2-inc h a nd 3-inc h  
Pa p e r c o re size  
Ro ll p a p e r o ute r  
d ia m e te r  
150 m m o r le ss  
Wid th  
Sure Color T7000  
254 m m (10 inc he s) to 1,118 m m (44 inc he s)  
Sure Color T5000  
254 m m (10 inc he s) to 914 m m (36 inc he s)  
Sure Color T3000  
254 m m (10 inc he s) to 610 m m (24 inc he s)  
Pa p e r Thic kne ss  
0.08 to 0.5 m m  
Ava ila b le wid th fo r 254 m m / 10 inc he s  
b o rd e rle ss p rinting  
300 m m / 11.8 inc he s  
Sup e r A3/ B/ 329 m m  
406 m m / 16 inc he s  
17 inc he s  
B2/ 515 m m  
A1/ 594 m m  
610 m m / 24 inc he s  
728 m m  
A0/ 841 m m  
914 m m / 36 inc he s  
1030 m m  
1118 m m / 44 inc he s  
Options and Information 229  
Cut she e t  
Me d ia typ e s  
Wid th  
Pla in p a p e r a nd re c yc le d p a p e r  
Sure Color T7000  
210 m m (A4) to 1,118 m m (44 inc he s)  
Sure Color T5000  
210 m m (A4) to 914 m m (36 inc he s)  
Sure Color T3000  
210 m m (A4) to 610 m m (24 inc he s)  
Le ng th  
279.4 to 1,580 m m  
0.08 to 0.8 m m  
Pa p e r Thic kne ss  
Ava ila b le wid th  
fo r b o rd e rle ss  
p rinting  
254 m m / 10 inc he s  
300 m m / 11.8 inc he s  
Sup e r A3/ B/ 329 m m  
406 m m / 16 inc he s  
17 inc he s  
B2/ 515 m m  
A1/ 594 m m  
610 m m / 24 inc he s  
728 m m  
A0/ 841 m m  
914 m m / 36 inc he s  
1030 m m  
1118 m m / 44 inc he s  
Be fore p rinting on non-Ep son m e d ia  
When using non-Epson media (Custom Paper), make the paper configuration according to  
the paper characteristics before printing. Settings are adjusted as follows.  
O Select Custom Paper Setting in the printer Paper menu.  
See “Paper menu” on page 171.  
O Save custom paper settings to the printer using EPSON LFP Remote Panel 2.  
O Save custom paper settings created in the printer driver to the computer (Windows).  
Save settings using the Custom Settings option in the Advanced tab.  
See “Adding Media Types” on page 151.  
Options and Information 230  
When the custom media types are selected both with the printer and in the printer driver  
Media Type menu, priority is given to printer driver settings.  
O Adjusting Settings in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)  
From the Advanced screen, open Paper Configuration dialog and adjust settings as  
desired.  
See the printer driver help for more details.  
Detailed adjustments can be made to user media settings using the Custom Paper  
Setting option in the printer Paper menu.  
Note:  
O Be sure to check the paper characteristics such as paper tension, ink fixating, or paper  
thickness before setting the custom paper. For the paper’s characteristics, check the paper’s  
documentation or with your local dealer.  
O Test the print quality with this printer before purchasing a large amount of paper.  
O If colors in printed images on the custom paper are uneven, use unidirectional printing. For  
unidirectional printing, select Printer Settings > Print Quality (Windows) or Mode (Mac  
OS X) > Advanced Settings and clear the High Speed check box.  
Options and Information 231  
Note s Whe n Moving or Tra nsp orting the Printe r  
Perform the following operations when moving or transporting the printer.  
Position your hands where shown when lifting the printer.  
SureColor T7000/SureColor T5000  
SureColor T3000  
Important:  
O Only hold the required area; otherwise, the printer may be damaged.  
O Move and transport the printer with ink cartridges installed. Do not remove the ink cartridges;  
otherwise, the nozzles may be clogged and make it impossible to print, or ink may leak.  
Be fore Moving or Tra nsp orting  
Make the following preparations in advance before moving or transporting the printer.  
O Turn off the printer and remove all cables.  
O Remove any paper.  
O Remove any optional components if they are installed. (The stand (24”) may be left in  
place when SureColor T3000 printers are moved.)  
Options and Information 232  
Note s on Tra nsp orting  
When transporting the printer, repack it using the original box and packing materials to  
protect it from shock and vibration.  
Afte r Moving or Tra nsp orting  
After moving or transporting, check if the print head is clogged before use.  
See “Checking for clogged nozzles” on page 184.  
Syste m Re q uire m e nts  
The following system requirements are necessary to install and use the software for this  
printer.  
Windows  
Op e ra ting syste m  
Wind o ws XP/ Wind o ws XP x64  
Wind o ws Vista / Wind o ws Vista x64  
Wind o ws 7/ Wind o ws 7 x64  
CPU  
C o re 2 Duo 3.05 G Hz o r b e tte r  
1 G B o r m o re a va ila b le m e m o ry  
32 G B o r m o re  
Me m o ry  
Ava ila b le ha rd d isk sp a c e  
Inte rfa c e  
Hi-Sp e e d USB-C o m p a tib le with the USB 2.0  
Sp e c ific a tio n.  
*
Ethe rne t 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX/ 1000BASE-T  
SVG A (800 × 600) o r hig he r re so lutio n  
Disp la y re so lutio n  
* Use a shielded twisted-pair cable (Category 5 or higher).  
Note:  
When installing, you must log in as a user with a Computer administrator (a user belonging to the  
Administrators group).  
Options and Information 233  
Mac OS X  
Op e ra ting syste m  
CPU  
Ma c OS X 10.5.8 o r la te r  
C o re 2 Duo 3.05 G Hz o r b e tte r  
1 G B o r m o re a va ila b le m e m o ry  
32 G B o r m o re  
Me m o ry  
Ava ila b le ha rd d isk sp a c e  
Disp la y re so lutio n  
Inte rfa c e  
WXG A (1280 × 800) o r hig he r re so lutio n  
Hi-Sp e e d USB-C o m p a tib le with the USB 2.0  
Sp e c ific a tio n.  
*
Ethe rne t 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX/ 1000BASE-T  
* Use a shielded twisted-pair cable (Category 5 or higher).  
Options and Information 234  
Sp e c ific a tions Ta b le  
Printe r Sp e c ific a tions  
Printing m e tho d  
O n-d e m a nd ink je t  
No zzle c o nfig ura tio n  
Bla c k: 360 no zzle s × 2 ro ws × 2 c o lo rs (Pho to Bla c k a nd Ma tte  
Bla c k)  
C o lo r: 360 no zzle s × 2 ro ws × 3 c o lo rs (Ye llo w, Ma g e nta , a nd  
C ya n)  
Re so lutio n (m a xim um )  
C o ntro l c o d e  
2880 × 1440 d p i  
ESC / P ra ste r (und isc lo se d c o m m a nd )  
*1  
HP-G L/ 2, HP RTL  
Pa p e r fe e d m e tho d  
Built-in m e m o ry  
Fric tio n fe e d  
512MB fo r Ma in  
128MB fo r Ne two rk  
Ra te d vo lta g e  
AC 100 to 240 V  
50 to 60 Hz  
Ra te d fre q ue nc y ra ng e  
Ra te d c urre nt  
Sure Co lo r T7000: 1.0 to 0.5 A  
Sure Co lo r T5000: 0.9 to 0.5 A  
Sure Co lo r T3000: 0.8 to 0.4 A  
Po we r c o nsum p tio n  
In use  
Sure Co lo r T7000: Ap p ro xim a te ly 72 W  
Sure Co lo r T5000: Ap p ro xim a te ly 65 W  
Sure Co lo r T3000: Ap p ro xim a te ly 54 W  
Sle e p m o d e  
Po we r o ff  
3.0 W o r le ss  
0.4 W o r le ss  
Te m p e ra ture  
O p e ra ting : 10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F)  
Sto ra g e (b e fo re unp a c king ):  
–20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F) (within 120 ho urs a t 60°C (140°F),  
within a m o nth a t 40°C (104°F))  
Sto ra g e (a fte r unp a c king ):  
–20 to 40°C (–4 to 104°F) (within a m o nth a t 40°C (104°F))  
Hum id ity  
Op e ra ting : 20 to 80% (witho ut c o nd e nsa tio n)  
Sto ra g e (b e fo re unp a c king ): 5 to 85% (witho ut c o nd e nsa tio n)  
Sto ra g e (a fte r unp a c king ): 5 to 85% (witho ut c o nd e nsa tio n)  
Options and Information 235  
Printe r Sp e c ific a tions  
Op e ra ting te m p e ra ture / hum id ity  
(o p tio na l Ha rd Disk Unit no t insta lle d )  
Op e ra ting te m p e ra ture / hum id ity  
(o p tio na l Ha rd Disk Unit insta lle d )  
Exte rna l d im e nsio ns  
Sure Co lo r T7000:  
*2  
(W) 1608 × (D) 813 × (H) 1128 m m  
Sure Co lo r T5000:  
*2  
(W) 1405 × (D) 813 × (H) 1128 m m  
Sure Co lo r T3000:  
(W) 1050 × (D) 691 × (H) 613 m m  
*2  
(with sta nd (24”): (W) 1050 × (D) 813 × (H) 1128 m m )  
*3  
We ig ht  
Sure Co lo r T7000: Ap p ro xim a te ly 82 kg  
Sure Co lo r T5000: Ap p ro xim a te ly 75 kg  
Sure Co lo r T3000: Ap p ro xim a te ly 51 kg  
(with sta nd (24”): Ap p ro xim a te ly 61 kg )  
Options and Information 236  
*1 For information on HP-GL/2 and HP RTL, see the Epson website.  
*2 Paper basket closed.  
*3 Excluding ink cartridges.  
Ink Sp e c ific a tions  
Typ e  
Sp e c ia l ink c a rtrid g e s  
Pig m e nt ink  
Bla c k: Pho to Bla c k, Ma tte Bla c k  
Co lo r: Ye llo w, Ma g e nta , Cya n  
Use b y d a te  
Se e the d a te p rinte d o n the p a c ka g e (a t no rm a l  
te m p e ra ture )  
Print q ua lity g ua ra nte e  
e xp ira tio n  
1 ye a r (whe n insta lle d in p rinte r)  
Sto ra g e te m p e ra ture  
Uninsta lle d :  
–4 to 104°F (–20 to 40°C ) (within 4 d a ys a t –4°F [–20°C], a  
m o nth a t 104°F [40°C])  
Insta lle d in p rinte r:  
–4 to 104°F (–20 to 40°C) (within 4 d a ys –4°F [–20°C], a  
m o nth a t 104°F [40°C])  
Tra nsp o rting :  
–4 to 104°F (–20 to 40°C ) (within 4 d a ys a t –4°F [–20°C], a  
m o nth a t 104°F [40°C ], 72 ho urs a t 140°F [60°C])  
Ca rtrid g e d im e nsio ns  
700m l:  
(W) 40 × (D) 305 × (H) 110 m m  
350m l:  
(W) 40 × (D) 200 × (H) 110 m m  
110m l:  
(W) 25 × (D) 200 × (H) 110 m m  
Important:  
O We recommend that you remove and shake the installed ink cartridges thoroughly once  
every three months to ensure print quality.  
O The ink freezes if left at below –4°F (–20°C) for a long time. If it does freeze, leave it at room  
temperature 77°F (25°C) for at least four hours (without condensation).  
O Do not refill the ink.  
Options and Information 237  
Sta nd a rd s a nd Ap p rova ls  
Sa fe ty  
UL 60950-1  
C AN/ C SA C22.2 No .60950-1  
Lo w Vo lta g e Dire c tive  
2006/ 95/ EC  
EN 60950-1  
EMC  
FC C p a rt 15 sub p a rt B Cla ss B  
C AN/ C SA-C EI/ IEC CISPR 22 C la ss B  
AS/ NZS CISPR 22 C la ss B  
EMC Dire c tive  
2004/ 108/ EC  
EN 55022 Cla ss B  
EN 55024  
EN 61000-3-2  
EN 61000-3-3  
FCC Com p lia nc e Sta te m e nt  
For Unite d Sta te s Use rs  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
O Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
O Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
O Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
O Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Options and Information 238  
WARNING  
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will  
invalidate the FCC Certification of this device and may cause interference levels which  
exceed the limits established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the  
user to obtain and use a shielded equipment interface cable with this device. If this  
equipment has more than one interface connector, do not leave cables connected to  
unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer  
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
For Ca na d ia n Use rs  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Options and Information 239  
Ap p e nd ix B  
Whe re To Ge t He lp  
New :See comments to select sections you need. The word "other" indicates products except for inkjet, SPC, Page, and SIDM.  
Conta c ting Ep son Sup p ort  
New :For All products  
Epson provides technical support and information on the installation, configuration, and  
operation of professional printing products through the EPSON Preferred Limited Warranty  
Plan. Dial (888) 377-6611, 6 AM to 6 PM, Pacific Time, Monday through Friday. Days and  
hours of support are subject to change without notice.  
Before you call, make sure you have your Unit ID number, which is included with the  
EPSON Preferred Limited Warranty Plan information that came with your printer. You’ll  
also need your printer serial number and proof of purchase.  
Visit Epson’s U.S. support website (www.epson.com/support) or Canadian website  
(www.epson.ca/support) and select your product for solutions to common problems. You  
can download drivers, firmware, and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting  
advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.  
Note:  
For help using any other software on your system, see the documentation for that software for  
technical support information.  
Purc ha se Sup p lie s a nd Ac c e ssorie s  
You can purchase genuine EPSON ink cartridges, paper, and accessories from an EPSON  
authorized reseller. To find the nearest reseller, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766). Or  
you can purchase online at http://www.epsonstore.com (U.S. sales) or  
http://www.epson.ca (Canadian sales).  
Where To Get Help 240  
Ap p e nd ix C  
Softwa re Lic e nse Te rm s  
Op e n Sourc e Softwa re Lic e nse s  
1. This printer product includes open source software programs listed in Section 6)  
according to the license terms of each open source software program.  
2. We provide the source code of the GPL Programs, LGPL Programs, Apache License  
Program and ncftp license Program (each is defined in Section 6) until five (5) years  
after the discontinuation of same model of this printer product. If you desire to receive  
the source code above, please see the “Contacting Epson Support” in the User’s  
Guide, and contact the customer support of your region. You shall comply with the  
license terms of each open source software program.  
3. The open source software programs are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even  
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. See the license agreements of each open source software program for  
more details, which are described on \Manual\OSS.pdf in the Printer Software Disc.  
4. OpenSSL toolkit  
This printer product includes software developed by the OpenSSL project for use in the  
OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young  
5. The license terms of each open source software program are described on  
\Manual\OSS.pdf in the Printer Software Disc.  
6. The list of open source software programs which this printer product includes are as  
follows.  
Software License Terms 241  
GNU GPL  
This printer product includes the open source software programs which apply the GNU  
General Public License Version 2 or later version (“GPL Programs”).  
The list of GPL Programs:  
linux-2.6.35-arm1-epson12  
busybox-1.17.4  
udhcp 0.9.8cvs20050124-5  
ethtool-2.6.35  
e2fsprogs-1.41.14  
scrub-2.4  
smartmontools-5.40  
GNU Lesser GPL  
This printer product includes the open source software programs which apply the GNU  
Lesser General Public License Version 2 or later version (“Lesser GPL Programs”).  
The list of LGPL Programs:  
uclibc-0.9.32  
libusb-1.0.8  
zeroconf 0.6.1-1  
iksemel-rev25  
e2fsprogs-1.41.14  
Apache License  
This printer product includes the open source software program “Bonjour” which apply  
the Apache License Version 2.0 (“Apache License Program”).  
Bonjour License  
This printer product includes the open source software program “Bonjour” which  
applies the terms and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the “Bonjour”.  
Net-SNMP license  
This printer product includes the open source software program “Net-SNMP” which  
applies the terms and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the “Net-SNMP”.  
OpenSSL License/Original SSLeay License  
This printer product includes the open source software program “OpenSSL toolkit”  
which applies the license terms of OpenSSL License and Original SSLeay License.  
BSD License (Berkeley Software Distribution License)  
Software License Terms 242  
This printer product includes the open source software program “busybox-1.17.4”  
which apply the Berkeley Software Distribution License (“BSD Program”).  
Sun RPC License  
This printer product includes the open source software program “busybox-1.17.4”  
which apply the Sun RPC License (“Sun RPC Program”).  
ncftp license  
This printer product includes the open source software program “ncftp-3.2.4” which  
applies the terms and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the “ncftp”.  
sdparm license  
This printer product includes the open source software program “sdparm-1.06” which  
applies the terms and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the “sdparm”.  
e2fsprogs license  
This printer product includes the open source software program “e2fsprogs-1.41.14”  
which applies the terms and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the  
“e2fsprogs”.  
Bonjour  
This printer product includes the open source software programs which apply the Apple  
Public Source License Version1.2 or its latest version ("Bonjour Programs").  
We provide the source code of the Bonjour Programs pursuant to the Apple Public Source  
License Version1.2 or its latest version until five (5) years after the discontinuation of same  
model of this printer product. If you desire to receive the source code of the Bonjour  
Programs, please see the "Contacting Customer Support" in Appendix or Printing Guide of  
this User's Guide, and contact the customer support of your region.  
You can redistribute Bonjour Programs and/or modify it under the terms of the Apple Public  
Source License Version1.2 or its latest version.  
These Bonjour Programs are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied  
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
The Apple Public Source License Version1.2 is as follows. You also can see the Apple  
Public Source License Version1.2 at http://www.opensource.apple.com/apsl/.  
APPLE PUBLIC SOURCE LICENSE  
Version 2.0 - August 6, 2003  
Software License Terms 243  
1. General; Definitions. This License applies to any program or other work which Apple  
Computer, Inc. ("Apple") makes publicly available and which contains a notice placed by  
Apple identifying such program or work as "Original Code" and stating that it is subject to  
the terms of this Apple Public Source License version 2.0 ("License"). As used in this  
License:  
1.1 "Applicable Patent Rights" mean: (a) in the case where Apple is the grantor of rights, (i)  
claims of patents that are now or hereafter acquired, owned by or assigned to Apple and  
(ii) that cover subject matter contained in the Original Code, but only to the extent  
necessary to use, reproduce and/or distribute the Original Code without infringement; and  
(b) in the case where You are the grantor of rights, (i) claims of patents that are now or  
hereafter acquired, owned by or assigned to You and (ii) that cover subject matter in Your  
Modifications, taken alone or in combination with Original Code.  
1.2 "Contributor" means any person or entity that creates or contributes to the creation of  
Modifications.  
1.3 "Covered Code" means the Original Code, Modifications, the combination of Original  
Code and any Modifications, and/or any respective portions thereof.  
1.4 "Externally Deploy" means: (a) to sublicense, distribute or otherwise make Covered  
Code available, directly or indirectly, to anyone other than You; and/or (b) to use Covered  
Code, alone or as part of a Larger Work, in any way to provide a service, including but not  
limited to delivery of content, through electronic communication with a client other than  
You.  
1.5 "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with  
code not governed by the terms of this License.  
1.6 "Modifications" mean any addition to, deletion from, and/or change to, the substance  
and/or structure of the Original Code, any previous Modifications, the combination of  
Original Code and any previous Modifications, and/or any respective portions thereof.  
When code is released as a series of files, a Modification is: (a) any addition to or deletion  
from the contents of a file containing Covered Code; and/or (b) any new file or other  
representation of computer program statements that contains any part of Covered Code.  
1.7 "Original Code" means (a) the Source Code of a program or other work as originally  
made available by Apple under this License, including the Source Code of any updates or  
upgrades to such programs or works made available by Apple under this License, and that  
has been expressly identified by Apple as such in the header file(s) of such work; and (b)  
the object code compiled from such Source Code and originally made available by Apple  
under this License  
1.8 "Source Code" means the human readable form of a program or other work that is  
suitable for making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus any  
associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of  
an executable (object code).  
Software License Terms 244  
1.9 "You" or "Your" means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under this  
License. For legal entities, "You" or "Your" includes any entity which controls, is controlled  
by, or is under common control with, You, where "control" means (a) the power, direct or  
indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or  
otherwise, or (b) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares or  
beneficial ownership of such entity.  
2. Permitted Uses; Conditions & Restrictions. Subject to the terms and conditions of this  
License, Apple hereby grants You, effective on the date You accept this License and  
download the Original Code, a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, to the extent  
of Apple's Applicable Patent Rights and copyrights covering the Original Code, to do the  
following:  
2.1 Unmodified Code. You may use, reproduce, display, perform, internally distribute  
within Your organization, and Externally Deploy verbatim, unmodified copies of the Original  
Code, for commercial or non-commercial purposes, provided that in each instance:  
(a) You must retain and reproduce in all copies of Original Code the copyright and other  
proprietary notices and disclaimers of Apple as they appear in the Original Code, and keep  
intact all notices in the Original Code that refer to this License; and  
(b) You must include a copy of this License with every copy of Source Code of Covered  
Code and documentation You distribute or Externally Deploy, and You may not offer or  
impose any terms on such Source Code that alter or restrict this License or the recipients'  
rights hereunder, except as permitted under Section 6.  
2.2 Modified Code. You may modify Covered Code and use, reproduce, display, perform,  
internally distribute within Your organization, and Externally Deploy Your Modifications and  
Covered Code, for commercial or non-commercial purposes, provided that in each  
instance You also meet all of these conditions:  
(a) You must satisfy all the conditions of Section 2.1 with respect to the Source Code of the  
Covered Code;  
(b) You must duplicate, to the extent it does not already exist, the notice in Exhibit A in each  
file of the Source Code of all Your Modifications, and cause the modified files to carry  
prominent notices stating that You changed the files and the date of any change; and  
(c) If You Externally Deploy Your Modifications, You must make Source Code of all Your  
Externally Deployed Modifications either available to those to whom You have Externally  
Deployed Your Modifications, or publicly available. Source Code of Your Externally  
Deployed Modifications must be released under the terms set forth in this License,  
including the license grants set forth in Section 3 below, for as long as you Externally  
Deploy the Covered Code or twelve (12) months from the date of initial External  
Deployment, whichever is longer. You should preferably distribute the Source Code of  
Your Externally Deployed Modifications electronically (e.g. download from a web site).  
Software License Terms 245  
2.3 Distribution of Executable Versions. In addition, if You Externally Deploy Covered Code  
(Original Code and/or Modifications) in object code, executable form only, You must  
include a prominent notice, in the code itself as well as in related documentation, stating  
that Source Code of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License with  
information on how and where to obtain such Source Code.  
2.4 Third Party Rights. You expressly acknowledge and agree that although Apple and  
each Contributor grants the licenses to their respective portions of the Covered Code set  
forth herein, no assurances are provided by Apple or any Contributor that the Covered  
Code does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entity.  
Apple and each Contributor disclaim any liability to You for claims brought by any other  
entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise. As a condition to  
exercising the rights and licenses granted hereunder, You hereby assume sole  
responsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed, if any. For example,  
if a third party patent license is required to allow You to distribute the Covered Code, it is  
Your responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Covered Code.  
3. Your Grants. In consideration of, and as a condition to, the licenses granted to You  
under this License, You hereby grant to any person or entity receiving or distributing  
Covered Code under this License a non-exclusive, royalty-free, perpetual, irrevocable  
license, under Your Applicable Patent Rights and other intellectual property rights (other  
than patent) owned or controlled by You, to use, reproduce, display, perform, modify,  
sublicense, distribute and Externally Deploy Your Modifications of the same scope and  
extent as Apple's licenses under Sections 2.1 and 2.2 above.  
4. Larger Works. You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other  
code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single  
product. In each such instance, You must make sure the requirements of this License are  
fulfilled for the Covered Code or any portion thereof.  
5. Limitations on Patent License. Except as expressly stated in Section 2, no other patent  
rights, express or implied, are granted by Apple herein. Modifications and/or Larger Works  
may require additional patent licenses from Apple which Apple may grant in its sole  
discretion.  
6. Additional Terms. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support,  
indemnity or liability obligations and/or other rights consistent with the scope of the license  
granted herein ("Additional Terms") to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However,  
You may do so only on Your own behalf and as Your sole responsibility, and not on behalf  
of Apple or any Contributor. You must obtain the recipient's agreement that any such  
Additional Terms are offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify, defend  
and hold Apple and every Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims  
asserted against Apple or such Contributor by reason of any such Additional Terms.  
Software License Terms 246  
7. Versions of the License. Apple may publish revised and/or new versions of this License  
from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number. Once  
Original Code has been published under a particular version of this License, You may  
continue to use it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such  
Original Code under the terms of any subsequent version of this License published by  
Apple. No one other than Apple has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered  
Code created under this License.  
8. NO WARRANTY OR SUPPORT. The Covered Code may contain in whole or in part  
pre-release, untested, or not fully tested works. The Covered Code may contain errors that  
could cause failures or loss of data, and may be incomplete or contain inaccuracies. You  
expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Covered Code, or any portion thereof, is  
at Your sole and entire risk. THE COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND  
WITHOUT WARRANTY, UPGRADES OR SUPPORT OF ANY KIND AND APPLE AND  
APPLE'S LICENSOR(S) (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS "APPLE" FOR THE  
PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 8 AND 9) AND ALL CONTRIBUTORS EXPRESSLY  
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR  
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND  
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. APPLE AND EACH CONTRIBUTOR  
DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE  
COVERED CODE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE COVERED CODE  
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE COVERED  
CODE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE  
COVERED CODE WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR  
ADVICE GIVEN BY APPLE, AN APPLE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR ANY  
CONTRIBUTOR SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. You acknowledge that the Covered  
Code is not intended for use in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation,  
communication systems, or air traffic control machines in which case the failure of the  
Covered Code could lead to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental  
damage.  
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO  
EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR  
RELATING TO THIS LICENSE OR YOUR USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE COVERED  
CODE, OR ANY PORTION THEREOF, WHETHER UNDER A THEORY OF CONTRACT,  
WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCTS LIABILITY OR  
OTHERWISE, EVEN IF APPLE OR SUCH CONTRIBUTOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF  
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW  
THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,  
SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall Apple's total liability  
to You for all damages (other than as may be required by applicable law) under this  
License exceed the amount of fifty dollars ($50.00).  
Software License Terms 247  
10. Trademarks. This License does not grant any rights to use the trademarks or trade  
names "Apple", "Apple Computer", "Mac", "Mac OS", "QuickTime", "QuickTime Streaming  
Server" or any other trademarks, service marks, logos or trade names belonging to Apple  
(collectively "Apple Marks") or to any trademark, service mark, logo or trade name  
belonging to any Contributor. You agree not to use any Apple Marks in or as part of the  
name of products derived from the Original Code or to endorse or promote products  
derived from the Original Code other than as expressly permitted by and in strict  
compliance at all times with Apple's third party trademark usage guidelines which are  
posted at http://www.apple.com/legal/guidelinesfor3rdparties.html.  
11. Ownership. Subject to the licenses granted under this License, each Contributor  
retains all rights, title and interest in and to any Modifications made by such Contributor.  
Apple retains all rights, title and interest in and to the Original Code and any Modifications  
made by or on behalf of Apple ("Apple Modifications"), and such Apple Modifications will  
not be automatically subject to this License. Apple may, at its sole discretion, choose to  
license such Apple Modifications under this License, or on different terms from those  
contained in this License or may choose not to license them at all.  
12. Termination.  
12.1 Termination. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate:  
(a) automatically without notice from Apple if You fail to comply with any term(s) of this  
License and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of such breach;  
(b) immediately in the event of the circumstances described in Section 13.5(b); or  
(c) automatically without notice from Apple if You, at any time during the term of this  
License, commence an action for patent infringement against Apple; provided that Apple  
did not first commence an action for patent infringement against You in that instance.  
12.2 Effect of Termination. Upon termination, You agree to immediately stop any further  
use, reproduction, modification, sublicensing and distribution of the Covered Code. All  
sublicenses to the Covered Code which have been properly granted prior to termination  
shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature, should  
remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive, including but not  
limited to Sections 3, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.2 and 13. No party will be liable to any other for  
compensation, indemnity or damages of any sort solely as a result of terminating this  
License in accordance with its terms, and termination of this License will be without  
prejudice to any other right or remedy of any party.  
13. Miscellaneous.  
Software License Terms 248  
13.1 Government End Users. The Covered Code is a "commercial item" as defined in FAR  
2.101. Government software and technical data rights in the Covered Code include only  
those rights customarily provided to the public as defined in this License. This customary  
commercial license in technical data and software is provided in accordance with FAR  
12.211 (Technical Data) and 12.212 (Computer Software) and, for Department of Defense  
purchases, DFAR 252.227-7015 (Technical Data -- Commercial Items) and 227.7202-3  
(Rights in Commercial Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation).  
Accordingly, all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights  
set forth herein.  
13.2 Relationship of Parties. This License will not be construed as creating an agency,  
partnership, joint venture or any other form of legal association between or among You,  
Apple or any Contributor, and You will not represent to the contrary, whether expressly, by  
implication, appearance or otherwise.  
13.3 Independent Development. Nothing in this License will impair Apple's right to acquire,  
license, develop, have others develop for it, market and/or distribute technology or  
products that perform the same or similar functions as, or otherwise compete with,  
Modifications, Larger Works, technology or products that You may develop, produce,  
market or distribute.  
13.4 Waiver; Construction. Failure by Apple or any Contributor to enforce any provision of  
this License will not be deemed a waiver of future enforcement of that or any other  
provision. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be  
construed against the drafter will not apply to this License.  
13.5 Severability. (a) If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision  
of this License, or portion thereof, to be unenforceable, that provision of the License will be  
enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the economic benefits and  
intent of the parties, and the remainder of this License will continue in full force and effect.  
(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing, if applicable law prohibits or restricts You from fully  
and/or specifically complying with Sections 2 and/or 3 or prevents the enforceability of  
either of those Sections, this License will immediately terminate and You must immediately  
discontinue any use of the Covered Code and destroy all copies of it that are in your  
possession or control.  
13.6 Dispute Resolution. Any litigation or other dispute resolution between You and Apple  
relating to this License shall take place in the Northern District of California, and You and  
Apple hereby consent to the personal jurisdiction of, and venue in, the state and federal  
courts within that District with respect to this License. The application of the United Nations  
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded.  
13.7 Entire Agreement; Governing Law. This License constitutes the entire agreement  
between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof. This License shall be  
governed by the laws of the United States and the State of California, except that body of  
California law concerning conflicts of law.  
Software License Terms 249  
Where You are located in the province of Quebec, Canada, the following clause applies:  
The parties hereby confirm that they have requested that this License and all related  
documents be drafted in English.  
Les parties ont exigé que le présent contrat et tous les documents connexes soient rédigés  
en anglais.  
EXHIBIT A.  
"Portions Copyright (c) 1999-2003 Apple Computer, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
This file contains Original Code and/or Modifications of Original Code as defined in and  
that are subject to the Apple Public Source License Version 2.0 (the 'License'). You may  
not use this file except in compliance with the License. Please obtain a copy of the License  
at http://www.opensource.apple.com/apsl/ and read it before using this file.  
The Original Code and all software distributed under the License are distributed on an 'AS  
IS' basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND  
APPLE HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL SUCH WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, QUIET ENJOYMENT OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Please see  
the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License."  
Othe r Softwa re Lic e nse s  
Info-ZIP c op yrig ht a nd lic e nse  
This is version 2007-Mar-4 of the Info-ZIP license. The definitive version of this document  
should be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely and a copy  
at http://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html.  
Copyright © 1990-2007 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.  
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as the following set of  
individuals:  
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly,  
Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,  
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van  
der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George  
Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M.  
Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich  
Wales, Mike White.  
Software License Terms 250  
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial  
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the above disclaimer and the  
following restrictions:  
1.  
Re d istrib utio ns o f so urc e c o d e (in who le o r in p a rt) m ust re ta in the a b o ve c o p yrig ht no tic e ,  
d e finitio n, d isc la im e r, a nd this list o f c o nd itio ns.  
2.  
Re d istrib utio ns in b ina ry fo rm (c o m p ile d e xe c uta b le s a nd lib ra rie s) m ust re p ro d uc e the a b o ve  
c o p yrig ht no tic e , d e finitio n, d isc la im e r, a nd this list o f c o nd itio ns in d o c um e nta tio n a nd / o r  
o the r m a te ria ls p ro vid e d with the d istrib utio n. The so le e xc e p tio n to this c o nd itio n is  
re d istrib utio n o f a sta nd a rd UnZip SFX b ina ry (inc lud ing SFXWiz) a s p a rt o f a se lf-e xtra c ting  
a rc hive ; tha t is p e rm itte d witho ut inc lusio n o f this lic e nse , a s lo ng a s the no rm a l SFX b a nne r  
ha s no t b e e n re m o ve d fro m the b ina ry o r d isa b le d .  
3.  
Alte re d ve rsio ns--inc lud ing , b ut no t lim ite d to , p o rts to ne w o p e ra ting syste m s, e xisting p o rts  
with ne w g ra p hic a l inte rfa c e s, ve rsio ns with m o d ifie d o r a d d e d func tio na lity, a nd d yna m ic ,  
sha re d , o r sta tic lib ra ry ve rsio ns no t fro m Info -ZIP--m ust b e p la inly m a rke d a s suc h a nd m ust no t  
b e m isre p re se nte d a s b e ing the o rig ina l so urc e o r, if b ina rie s, c o m p ile d fro m the o rig ina l  
so urc e . Suc h a lte re d ve rsio ns a lso m ust no t b e m isre p re se nte d a s b e ing Info -ZIP  
re le a se s--inc lud ing , b ut no t lim ite d to , la b e ling o f the a lte re d ve rsio ns with the na m e s "Info -ZIP"  
(o r a ny va ria tio n the re o f, inc lud ing , b ut no t lim ite d to , d iffe re nt c a p ita liza tio ns), "Po c ke t  
UnZip ," "WiZ" o r "Ma c Zip " witho ut the e xp lic it p e rm issio n o f Info -ZIP. Suc h a lte re d ve rsio ns a re  
furthe r p ro hib ite d fro m m isre p re se nta tive use o f the Zip -Bug s o r Info -ZIP e -m a il a d d re sse s o r the  
Info -ZIP URL(s), suc h a s to im p ly Info -ZIP will p ro vid e sup p o rt fo r the a lte re d ve rsio ns.  
4.  
Info -ZIP re ta ins the rig ht to use the na m e s "Info -ZIP," "Zip ," "UnZip ," "UnZip SFX," "WiZ," "Po c ke t  
UnZip ," "Po c ke t Zip ," a nd "Ma c Zip " fo r its o wn so urc e a nd b ina ry re le a se s.  
Software License Terms 251  

Bryant 451P User Manual
Bunn TDS5 User Manual
Carrier 62DB User Manual
Dakota Digital LAT NR162 User Manual
Friedrich Air Conditioner US12C30 User Manual
Haier 0010515222 User Manual
Heat Controller Inc Air Conditioner EKTH User Manual
Holland Fifth Wheel XA 3501 Series User Manual
Honda Automobiles GX200 User Manual
Honeywell Automobile Parts ALF502L User Manual